Home

2009 Jeep Liberty Owner`s Manual

1. Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode lll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play li Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios Only System Activation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 D Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting Satellite Mode A Satellite Ant nria eee eR EUR Reception Quality 00 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode O Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone I Equipped ss e eter o ERES Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES Equipped csecec erp erts ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped cs pied Ls RR PAR piti Right Hand Switch Functions 270 Left Hand Switch Functions For Radio Op ration oce eodd Rede dad 271 Left Hand Switch Functions For Media Le CD Operation eese ee as 271 E CD DVD Maintenance 0 000 271 mm Bl Climate Controls s esee 272 Manual Air Conditioning And
2. General Information 0 ll Voice Recognition System VR It Equipped s ud grains eene Sp PS dS Voice Recognition System VR Operation 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M o Manual Front Seat Adjustments Recliner Adjustment 4 Lumbar Support If Equipped Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped isset aeree aah ea ng Power Seat If Equipped El Head Restrdints vocc Res iss a Heated Seats If Equipped 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat Feature ios qx ovo Yat TERN E RO acne H Driver Memory Seat If Equipped Programming The Memory Feature 136 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter To The Memory Feature e act fannie caos nat aaa 137 Memory Position Recall 138 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only 004 139 ll To Open And Close The Hood 140 dio P T 142 Exterior And Interior Lighting Control 142 Headlights And Parking Lights 142 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 142 Headlights With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 143 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 o Headlight Time Delay If Equipped
3. 2 05 348 Trip Odometer 2 24 ces a eves neea ces 208 Trip Odometer Reset Button Turn Signals 498 INDEX MM UConnect Hands Free Phone 94 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 474 Universal Transmitter llle 163 Unleaded Gasoline llle 363 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 47 Upholstery Care xeu x eR Rer Re 436 Vanity MitfOIS es va aya eI puer ahh a dedos ge 93 Variance Compass 6 6 6 6 eee eee eee 220 Vehicle Certification Label 0 369 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading sice 3244 5 kc RR 338 369 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage scetur esce pee EE epe 282 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Viscosity Engine Qil sreci susiradi enirat 412 Voice Recognition System VR 123 Warning Flasher Hazard 392 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 200 Warning Roll Over e eatae ned eaa nae E 4 Warnings and Cautions 0000 7 Warranty Information 00000 472 Washers Windshield 149 153 417 Water Driving Through cce Res 310 Waxing and Polishing 06 433 Wheel and Wheel Trim lessen 435 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 435 Wheel Mounting ooo te tesdcrea seteia ieas 399 Wind Buffeting lt s rcsssarrresssess as 39 172 177 Wi
4. sess 413 Finish Care 4i 42 64 08 b abd aa gd oueeds 433 Flashers Hazard Warning seses nrar a sac E etes 392 Tum Signal i e e Re 83 145 203 446 447 Flash To Pass leen 147 Flooded Engine Starting 0 290 Floor Console 1 0 cc ees 183 Ehud Brake megier oneee Se Shed ie cd RR 450 Fluid Capacities 2 ainda gt eco bo inasi 448 Ehud Leaks a4 227 2253 ORY 84 LPPGDRESCREG e 83 Fluid Level Checks 0 005 428 430 Automatic Transmission 428 Brake 2s ekane hina ee cage ae vx 426 Cooling System llle 421 Engine Oil csse e Ere kn 411 Power Steering sacos ees Re YR oed 315 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 449 Fog Light Service vee sees eee eee d 446 Fog Lights e 142 144 203 446 Folding Rear Seat 0 2 0 ee eee eee 133 Four Wheel Drive SMN egs Sais ss atte a soe ee 299 301 304 306 SYSTEMS 354 deles Hp Xa waa ded gra 299 304 Four Wheel Drive Operation 299 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 386 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 386 Front Axle Differential lessen 430 lg PT CPC TL 363 Adding 232s e Ue ue Ree ETE Ea ee 367 Additives acc84 0 008 RE eld RER E 365 Clean Att s ose dae ide EE ERE E 363 Ethanol 25 22s Re ERR wd 364 Filler Cap Gas Cap 6 0 0 eee ee eee 367 Gasoline zac ok x REETOEX 363 Gauge x casa e eue sette voltate ceo tte a UR A 200 Materia
5. 190 Light Bulbs i eee ec eR es 83 444 Lights ie cr a Rb ea eed es 83 142 Apap 234i meme ins oe nad 68 82 212 AMU LOCK kc ac eR RES EE 204 Automatic Headlights 142 Back Up Battery Sayer vals edo uu oa be eee a 147 Brake Assist Warning 205 332 Brake Warning se aires pstnpi trtni ees 210 Bulb Replacement 0 444 445 Cargo eens ve week ile eohaat we BRA RUE d 147 Courtesy Reading i es yer ein eS aon bo 147 CUSE gmaria ein EAEE dame e derer d des 210 Daytime Running eie i9 ERA 144 Dimmer Switch Headlight 142 146 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicators seres ddd eh 205 329 332 Engine Temperature Warning 206 EXEO se taedis vate d CUP sea s 83 FOR coser versatus e tate d neta dcs 144 203 446 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 0 204 205 206 208 302 307 Hazard Warning Flasher 392 Headlight Switch seseris epsa yine iists 142 Headlights 000 142 445 488 INDEX MM Headlights On Reminder 144 Headlights On With Wipers 143 151 High Beam eres osos e wae nugi 146 203 High Beam Indicator 203 High Beam Low Beam Select 146 Hill Descent Control Indicator 205 326 Muminated Entty esee e mem 19 Instrument Cluster lesus 142 200 Intensity Control 0 0 0 00 0202 0000 148 Interior 2x3 He wi ee RE RE ea 147 1
6. O Front Storage Compartment 182 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dim ming feature is activated ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 R Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never 81789204 spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles an
7. NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C Air Filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a
8. Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to ires General Information in this section for infor mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not incre
9. 6 0 iepak a eee 347 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 364 O Tread Wear Indicators 348 MMT In Gasoline 00 365 D Life Of Tie Reg ede RREROE Bac 349 Materials Added To Fuel 365 O Replacement Tires 00 349 Fuel System Cautions 366 aie Chains s ee Bae a hea ch dors 350 Carbon Monoxide Warnings Ls 366 Bl Tire Rotation Recommendations 352 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME B Adding Buel 44 eis edevas eon WA cas 367 O Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 367 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 369 a Vehicle Loading cereo vais ae 4 see oes 369 O Certification Label 00 369 H Trailer Towing o oo een 371 O Common Towing Definitions 372 O Trailer Hitch Classification 376 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings llle 377 Trailer And Tongue Weight 379 Towing Requirements lesse 380 Towing lips 4524225 Re SPP AG Debes 384 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 0 386 Towing 2WD Models 386 Towing 4WD Models 386 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Do
10. CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 452 Required Maintenance Intervals H Maintenance Schedule 4 453 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be d
11. NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the Automatic Compass Calibration COMPASS button to display one of eight com pass readings an
12. Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely e The following table shows examples on how to calcu exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities calculated in step 4 of your vehicle with varyi
13. if a frontal side or rollover collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size The ORC receives this data from the Occupant Classification Module OCM The ORC will detect rollovers but not rear impacts The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position These include all of the items listed above except the Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light the instrument panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and they will not inflate e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light and PAD Indicator Light for six to N eight seconds as a self check when the igni tion is first turned ON After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off The PAD Indicator Light will function normally refer to infor mation on Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTI
14. serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style 75 mph 120 km h vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein Radial Ply Tires stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires 346 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Dama
15. 454 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME At Each Stop for Fuel e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct ine oi ive mi tion e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a Eee fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level At Each Oil Change while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when Change the Shamed Bite the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if CAUTION required Failure to perform the required maintenance items Once a Month may result in damage to the vehicle e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals pages for the required maintenance intervals as required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transmission and add as needed ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a mi m
16. Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currentl
17. Red equipped Universal Garage M5 25 Amp Power Inverter if Door Opener ee Natural equipped if equipped Vanity Light ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Mil 10Amp Automatic Tempera M15 20 Amp Multifunction Control Red ture Control ATC Yellow Switch Cabin Com if equipped partment Node M12 30Amp Radio Amplifier if CCN Steering Col Green equipped umn Control Module MI3 20 Amp Cabin Compartment un 5 s Yellow Node CCN Wireless wider uen Control Module Poner E WCM equipped IR Sensor Multifunction Control if equipped Transfer Switch Case Module if M14 equipped M16 10Amp Occupant Restraint Red Controller ORC 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Yellow Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M17 15 Amp Exterior Lighting M20 15 Amp Interior Lighting Blue Left Front Park and Blue Steering Wheel Side Marker Left Tail Switches if and Running License equipped Switch Lights Bank Electronic Ve M18 15 Amp Exterior Lighting hicle Information Blue Right Front Park and Center EVIC if Side Marker Right equipped Tail and Running M21 20Amp Auto Shut Down Lights Yellow AS
18. These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Two additional electronic brake control system options are Hill Descent Control HDC and Trailer Sway Control TSC Your vehicle may be equipped with one or both of these options Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve hicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is re
19. 2 Acc 4 Start front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle ope
20. 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 5 Store the disc in its case after playing Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 81c2cd2b Manual Temperature Control The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner pushbuttons ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Blower Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates
21. 450 Battery a cis cach As qus sare ew ro ee FR 414 Emergency Starting 0000 000 400 Gas Caution ceo prisons ned ipares s iads 415 Jump Starting 26 4 ess e o es 400 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Belt SAL 4 ema Oe alt Hah rd XM eR 41 82 Body Mechanism Lubrication 417 B Pillar Location spss ie mn ERR Rs 338 Brake Assist System 0 000000 cee 321 Brake Assist Warning Light 205 Brake Control System Electronic 320 Brake Fluid esc ci ec or RR RR 450 Brake Parking 5 31 sinnets me IPS pan his 316 Brake System degen soe ache e er mea Bia ee 426 Anti Lock ABS isses ees 317 320 Fluid Check 2 4 Rem t RReRRR 426 450 Master Cylinder iz dad RE uen 426 Parking elem vee e E ect eR edes 316 Warning Light Brakes uet cava OO OU RARUS GR a ee 426 Brake Transmission Interlock 292 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 80 Brightness Interior Lights 148 Bulb Replacement scesu nesan kai masea 444 445 Bulbs Light seiss prerii Rm IER es 83 444 Calibration Compass ies 219 Capacities Fluid decas be eom eR Rte 448 Caps Filler Fuel 2c ad EA EG Mawes aaa 4 367 Oil Engine 2 2 pirssi mo ty sod deed 412 POWer Steering co ud wig eae thee St eee 315 Radiator Coolant Pressure 424 Car Washes cs3c4 894085 8 Seo EE Ra pe E ake 433 Carbon Monoxide Warning 81 36
22. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts 1 Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an unin tended electrical contact follow this procedure carefully Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without allowing the vehicles to touch WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmis sion in PARK or NEUTRAL for manual transmission and turn the ignition OFF for both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive battery post Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures a
23. In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 List Paired Cellular Phone Names Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another e Desine PHLONESUBGOR OCDE BUR phone paired with the UConnect system e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Press the PHONE button to begin Setup Phone Pairing uc P e After the Ready prompt and th
24. LL 266 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 422 423 448 Disposal pes avin ee Reb We gd 424 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 317 320 Anti Lock Warning Light 204 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Anti Ih ft System s ie cesi eth boas debes 212 Appearance Care scce cere esame pr PS 433 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assist Hill Start 2 6 nua aa ee 324 Assistance Towing 6 eee 109 Auto Down Power Windows 5 36 Auto Unlock Doors 0 0 0 0 32 Automatic Dimming Mirror Le 90 Automatic Door Locks llle 31 32 en INDEX 479 Automatic Headlights 0 142 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 209 216 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 276 Automatic Transaxle 2 0 0 0 291 Special Additives 000 428 Automatic Transmission 293 428 Adding BUI 35 ss wit sie iret pateta 428 450 Fluid and Filter Changes 428 Fluid Change see 428 Fluid Level Check 00 428 Fluid Type cay cad args deren tere a Page 2 450 Gear Ranges 44e oe tay sad PEL RA 294 Special Additives sprice ept imge eag 428 Torque Converter lees 298 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 178 Auxiliary Power Outlet 0 0 178 Axle Fluid au 24 20 sade Soh eed ode eee nee 450 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid
25. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window control on the other doors press and release the window LOCK button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press and release the window LOCK button again setting it in the up position Window Lockout Switch E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the Auto Up feature To do so perform the following proce dure 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can
26. could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer In addition only install tire chains on P225 75R16 or smaller tires en STARTING AND OPERATING 351 CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions e Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with CAUTION Continued e Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h e Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle tires other than P225 65R17 or smaller tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Continued Use o
27. curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbin
28. detent Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the multifunction lever It controls the operation of the interior lights and the brightness of the instrument panel lights 031406005 Dimmer Control Instrument Panel Dimming With the parking lights or headlights on rotate the dimmer control upward or downward to change the brightness of the instrument panel lights Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control to the first detent to brighten the odometer and radio display when the parking lights or headlights are on during daylight conditions Interior Light On Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat Off Rotate the dimmer control completely downward to the O OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent past the gx The windshield wiper washer control lever is intermittent
29. lower completely Using the PANIC Alarm NOTE The PANIC and Security Alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the PANIC and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To turn the PANIC Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the PANIC Alarm is on the headlights and turn signal lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the illuminated entry system will turn on The PANIC Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater During the PANIC Mode the door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE system will function normally PANIC mode will not disarm the Security System on vehicles so equipped NOTE You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the PANIC Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Programming in this section NOTE If you do not have a programmed RKE trans mitter contact your authorized dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE e P
30. memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to
31. than the minimum required by law 476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 478 INDEX MM About Your Brakes llle 316 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 317 320 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 423 Adding Fuel 2 2 22 gae deed 367 Additives Fuel llle 365 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 414 Air Conditioner Maintenance 415 Air Conditioning ard eh ERR TT esra 272 Air Conditioning Controls 272 Air Conditioning Filter 283 416 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 284 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 415 416 Air Conditioning System 272 276 415 Air Filter 22r u Daems d ae ae PAS ae Ea 414 Air Pressure Tires 2 0 0 0 0 000 cee eee 343 Airbag amp 2ereseeeee de bet rte deme der eases 52 Airbag Deployment llle 64 Airbag Light ae eaaa ee 68 82 212 Airbag Maintenance sagesse iea reai E 66 Alarm Panie aed m4 A WR ae E 24 Alarm Security Alarm 18 212 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio
32. to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Main Menu to switch to the main menu es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR hard key to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the
33. top periodically A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard is suggested The top should be clean and dry before application of the protectant CAUTION Avoid getting Scotchguard on the surrounding weather strips moldings paint or glass Damage to these items might occur Weather Strip Care Lubricate the weather strips periodically with MOPAR Weather Strip Lubricant to keep them soft and pliable ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e
34. type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the MUSIC TYPE screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the
35. 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reac tivated by repeating this procedure NOTE When the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARN
36. 143 a Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped cise sive eee emet 144 OLights On Reminder 144 O Fog Lights If Equipped 144 A Tur Signals 25 besdbe bi verdad eats 145 o High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 146 OFlash To Pass sels 147 BiInterior Lights is te be s 147 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 149 O Intermittent Wiper System 150 OMist Feature llle eee eee 151 o Headlights With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 151 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped Windshield Washers 00 B Tilt Steering Column ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped To Activate To Set At A Desired Speed To Deactivate To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing ll Rear Park Assist System If Equipped System Usage Precautions Enabling And Disabling The System 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M o System Operation Garage Door Opener If Equipped O Programming HomeLink o Security O Gate Operator Canadian Programming O Using HomeLink 04 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button O Troubleshooting Tips 0 O General Informati n sete rasse ter ta i ower Sunroof If Equipped O Opening Sunroof
37. 26g bue Spe Sine od Pep ds 183 Console Floor llle 183 Contract Service sse PER eRe eR EUG CERT 471 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 424 Cooling System ieciieca etr RReRERYS 421 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 423 Coolant Capacity 0 000 000 o 448 Coolant Level 0 0 00 0 llle 421 425 Disposal of Used Coolant 424 Drain Flush and Refill Ls 422 Inspection ee 425 Points to Remember 000005 425 Pressure Cap ai cis soe HERE E ES 424 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 422 448 449 Corrosion Protection 00 00 eee 433 Cruise Light 222242999299 Deve esi 210 Cupholders 5 itasse a erp te wt s a 181 Customer Assistance llle 469 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 148 Daytime Running Lights 144 Dealer Service llle 410 Defroster Rear Window 191 Defroster Windshield 83 274 275 280 Delay Intermittent Wipers 150 Diagnostic System Onboard 408 Dimmer Control 482 INDEX ae Dimmer Switch Headlight 146 Dipsticks Oil Engine csi em b REICH es 411 Power Steering 2 026064 5 peta eas ee E 315 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 424 Engine Oil cess parete gh ee dores he Rares 413 Door Locks ecd h REX PLA ead ox 29 Door Locks Automatic
38. At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioner If Present The front passenger seat belt is equipped with a preten sioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioner is triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Like the front airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km
39. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint For the outboard seating positions route the tether underneath the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint
40. D U L E S 8 towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a mi mi ood Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Co
41. Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors illuminate If this occurs see your authorized dealer for service CAUTION e The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle in cluding small obstacles Parking curbs might be WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even temporarily detected or not detected at all Ob stacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System Continued when using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots be fore backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
42. E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or bod CC CE 469 Speech Impaired TDD TIY 471 O Prepare For The Appointment 469 Service Contract nos esce esee DU tei A71 H Prepare A Est ke ye erines irs 469 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 472 O Be Reasonable With Requests 469 MIMOPAR Parts ues sex RR nd 472 H If You Need Assistance lle 469 WiReporting Safety Defects 472 O Chrysler LLC Customer Center 470 In The 50 United States And Washington o Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 470 I M a um mm DIn Mexico Contat se sese rekes tarda eee 470 Ii Cedesi etene ede adero Ae Wi Publication Order Forms 473 468 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Traction Grades liliis 475 Quality Grades lille 474 E Treadwear sime de bx EE Cn 475 Temperature Grades lesen 475 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 469 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Kee
43. Exhaust System llle 418 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se O Cooling System ys sace sea da sana e a a aiia 421 D Brake System arcean paee ru dO de ed bg 426 D Automatic Transmission 428 H Transter Case sce y ORA ens 428 D Front Rear Axle Fluid sss 430 O Sky Slider Top Care 04 430 O Appearance Care And Protection From CORTOSION isc devia epo e qo Rd dria Gu 433 EEEE ET IT CTI ICT T TTL 438 o Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 438 Bi Replacement Light Bulbs 444 B Bulb Replacement nmn 445 Headlight us aseo ER eret hp edes 445 Front Turn Signal And Front Side Marker Lights ua dE Em ers 446 Front Fog Light 0 0 446 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Back Up Lights cme direc soe pue CR RR EAR 447 W Fluid Capacities llle 448 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 449 Ernigin ca ead ca woe gn wa Ma eas 449 Chassis ia ghee Ras Sg CGU RES eS oe ER 450 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L 071005583 1 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Integrated Power Module 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicl
44. Express Opening Sunroof Manual Mode Closing Sunroof Express 171 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 171 Pinch Protect Feature 171 Pinch Protect Override 0 0 171 Venting Sunroof Express 171 Sunshade Operation 172 Wind Buffeting serm RR e RES 172 Sunroof Maintenance 172 Ignition Off Operation 172 li Sky Slider Full Length Open Roof 173 Sky Slider Usage Precautions 173 Power Top Control 04 174 Opening The Sky Slider 175 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 a Closing The Sky Slider 176 Console Storage Compartment 183 O Anti Pinch Protect Feature 17 W Cargo Area Features 0000 184 O Wind Bufteting 0 2244 5244 Rr Pee pits 177 Cargo Load Floor s e 2 254 5444 8h240 44 48 184 O Sky Slider Maintenance 178 W Rear Window Features 190 nee Bi Electrical Power Outlet 000 178 Rear Window Wiper Washer Bl Power Inverter If Equipped 180 E EQUPERGre a hasebs me B C apboldei 22 Ce EE X Xi E X ika 181 Bes Monies etn Eee tite ds bh ooo T r Tr rm 182 me Root Luggage Rack M Bquipped sa nirt en
45. Heating SYST es e a bdo et tun E aS C et d 272 Automatic Temperature Control ATC It Equippede i em eek cae eee ee oes 276 Operating TIPS 5 ara cedex bore o ede 282 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES oN D s 1 Air Outlet 5 Radio 9 Lower Switch Bank 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Glove Compartment 10 Storage Bin if equipped 3 Storage Tray 7 Climate Control 4 Center Air Outlet 8 Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Went uq ERU 4p oe ATE e gri e As e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81bb510e 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Fuel Door Reminder This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle lt where the fuel cap is located 3 Low Fuel Light This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to approximately one eighth tank 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper ti
46. Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mew phone Select a lenguage wil English Espanol bemporariy or Francais override Select phone e io be deleted p d Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing All Phones Deleted Note Awailable Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined DITES ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try a
47. Paint Damage 0 prodira ni kaiii 433 Panic Alarm 423 x oe cab ta Be oat es 24 Park Sense System Rear 158 Parking Brake i see da ene eee e 316 Parking On Hill s s scie hk rena 316 Passing Lightec periran drsna padui aoa ipasi 147 Personal Settings cedo rieres acea ridetis 221 Pels ia cats ard SOUR AG Oe EEA aE o 79 Pets Transporting 443492 be cd ae ii 79 Phone Cell lat ccc oa ee ie we eda ee 94 Phone Hands Free UConnect 94 Placard Tire and Loading Information 338 Polishing and Waxing 0 050 434 Power Door Locks ss pris bedes RR RR REIR 30 lnyvert t a 2exGo wea bec oem re esa REUS 180 MITOS Louer ore er YN Hcr RE e ele 92 C NR 131 HO 492 INDEX aaa SHETING oi ais ae seis eee ROS dorso s uis 314 315 SUNTOOL 2 aves ia ac rad REPRE P ees 169 Sunroof Sky Slider 173 430 Windows so 3 6 sea eb rk ERR n 35 Power Steering Fluid lees 450 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 51 Preparation for Jacking 00 395 Pretensioners Seat Beli s ie ii dide es oad een 47 Programmable Electronic Features 221 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 0 4 20 Radial Ply Tires 1 0 345 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 424 Radio Remote Controls 0005 270 Radio Satellite 2 0 eee 264 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 152 Rear Axle Differenti
48. REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal de pressed To operate the shift lock manual override per form the following steps 1 Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 4 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used 4 Speed Automatic Transmission NOTE Under
49. Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with iri clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film Special Care stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing a month UNE ur E E Ld MN It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept CAUTION clear and open e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of similar cause which destroys the paint and protective paint and decals coating have your vehicle repaired
50. Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 and 48 160 192 VBR 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in s
51. Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire
52. The 4WD indicator lights are located in the instrument cluster The NEUTRAL indicator light is located on the 4WD Control Switch If there is no indicator light on or flashing the transfer case position is 2 wheel drive 2WD If the indicator light is on the desired position 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW or NEUTRAL has been ob tained If One or More Shift Requirements are not met e An indicator light will flash e The transfer case will not shift NOTE The SERV 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up or it illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Shifting Procedures NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift the indicator light for the previous position will remain on and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift move the 4WD Control Switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WD to 4WD Lock Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily
53. UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All UConnect Phonebook Entries Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you EN wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed
54. VR hard key to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup E To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR hard key first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR hard key say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Manual Front Seat Adjustments The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat nea
55. a window on NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 8 INTRODUCTION EBENEN VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS A Word About Your Keys iesus O Ignition Key Removal sess a Key In Ignition Reminder MM Sentry Key cs a che Sa oro ERR Ran O Replacement Keys 00000 O Customer Key Programming O General Information 00 li Vehicle Security Alarm System If Equipped a Rearming Of The System To Arm The System 00000 18 To Disarm The System 0 0 19 Bi Illuminated Entry System 0 19 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 20 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 To Unlatch The Liftgate Flip Up Window 23 Express Down Window Feature It Equipped cic ace lay Bee eae wal wae rts 24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See O Using The Panic Alarm 24 O Programming Additional Transmitters 25 O Battery Replacement 0 25 D G
56. and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with the ra a dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or anoth
57. and engine oil 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine off road or frequent trailer towing Adjust parking brake on vehicles Inspect the CV joints equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter O C O O L ooo M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L
58. any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Data parameters that may be recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable light status if equipped e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire Pressure Monitoring System status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available Accord
59. as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fre
60. certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filter
61. dS eat E PRO n 129 Seatback Release 0 0 0 0 00 ee eee 133 T ng dios oa Pie EE Eri Romer Rus eer 131 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 212 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 422 449 Selection of Oll ces sce feeGnu da cess ees 412 Selec Trac Operation u p Eia ENa 0006 304 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 14 Sentry Key Programming llle 16 Sentry Key Replacement 0 16 Service Assistance 0 0 cee ee eee 469 Service Contract 2 sos as pad Periit ees 471 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator sess 202 Service Manuals llle 473 Setting the Clock 227 242 245 254 Settings Personal cece 221 Shift Lock Manual Override 292 Shifting Automatic Transmission l l 293 Transfer Case ssc so dle mea 299 301 304 306 Shoulder Belts llle 41 Side View Mirror Adjustment 91 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 283 Signals Turn 2 eee eee 83 145 203 446 447 Sky Slider Power Roof 0 173 430 Snow Chains Tire Chains 350 NENNEN INDEX 495 Spare Tire vue cies ee ue oem eek e 345 346 394 opatk Plugs 5 uerus bu hohe PETRA 449 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0 0 0 00 eee eee 449 Oil fox sede e ahd Ss dos ane ae a os 412 449 Speed Control Cruise Control 155 Speedometer qorasi kh
62. data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre s Specification quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 SPESE 342 95 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 22 05 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single sessio
63. drive straight up or down ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to AWD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush The
64. even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is on the inboard side of the seat Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped This feature allows the front passenger seat to fold flat for extended cargo space Some fold flat seats also have a hardback surface that you can use as a work surface when the seat is folded flat Pull up on the lever to fold down the seatback Fold Flat Passenger Seat es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Power Seat If Equipped For vehicles equipped with a power driver s seat use this The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or near the floor to tilt the seat For vehicles equipped with a power passenger seat use this switch to move the seat forward and rearward CAUTION Do not place any article under any seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Power Seat Switch 132 UNDERSTA
65. extreme cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only 2nd gear operation Normal op m eration will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Shift Lock Manual Override 204 STARTING AND OPERATING M Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be Gear Ranges done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake NEUTRAL position into another gear range when moving the shift lever between these gears PARK This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING e Never use PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move Shift Lever ment and possible injury or damage Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 WARNING Continued Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range for extended periods of time The engine may be e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK started in this range or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
66. following Dusty or off road conditions 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the engine air cleaner filter J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet replace if necessary off road or frequent trailer towing T Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends O O O and boot seals replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Rotate tires d Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires d If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary d Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi f
67. gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key in
68. h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro WARNING planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish The ABS cannot prevent accidents including The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must can prevent accidents their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 CAUTION e When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is subject to repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis possible detrimental effects of electronic interference sion or locking out overdrive whenever possible caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or els phones Engines may idle at higher speeds during w
69. ier e 312 Hill Start Assist HSA 0 324 B Traction Downhill sls 313 HDC Hill Descent Control If Equipped 326 O After Driving Off Road 313 Electronic Stability Program ESP 328 Bl Power Steering 0 6 0 eee 314 ESP BAS Warning Light And ESP TCS 1 Power Steering Fluid Check 315 Indicator Light 4a pared 332 M Parking Brake 316 H Tire Safety Information 333 E Anti Lock Brake System 317 add ep ate ME pi li Electronic Brake Control System 320 TEEOUERBUCIDOD E Na aii m 2 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 320 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 338 O Traction Control System TCS 321 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 Bl Tires General Information 342 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 353 O Tire Pressure ngu es prune RR Re ger an 342 Base System i usan Es RR Fr ORC Re d 355 O Tire Inflation Pressures 343 Premium System If Equipped 358 O Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 344 General Information 362 O Radial Ply Tires eee Mae ets 345 W Fuel Requirements 363 O0 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 345 Reformulated Gasoline iss O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 346 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends OTire Spinning
70. if necessary ood 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid 0 CO C L Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 457 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotat
71. is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 o
72. is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator light will flash 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate e The vehicle must be stopped e The vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline e The Gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear e For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK WARNING There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist HSA will not activate and slight rolling may occur such as on minor hills i e less than 7 or with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles people and objects and
73. it is sunny you may want more upper air lin this case set the Mode control ator between e and 5 In very cold weather if you need extra hest at the windshield set e Mode control ator near the i STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures silii 289 Brake Transmission Interlock Manual ONormal Starting 0 00000 289 QUENT quy ackucsi uiro Vil gee Mei Ch Se o Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or mopeed aromatic Transission EDU qae ei qd E ed ek ee 289 WMiFour Wheel Drive Operation G If Engine Fails To Start 290 MP1522 Command Trac Transfer Case ELATteE Starine osse eene RH RC ERR 290 I BIupped cx osseqadpsanee vid pisdes 293 MP3022 Selec Trac II Transfer Case Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 291 E Equipped esie 304 ll Automatic Transmission 00 291 ISO Dide pE PRTTEE TETTE T TET 310 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 292 B Off Road Driving Tips 0 00 cece 310 286 STARTING AND OPERATING M 3 When To Use 4WD Low Range 310 Brake Assist System BAS 321 a Driving Through Water 310 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 322 a Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 312 Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped 323 aHilChmbing
74. it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 13 Oil Pressure Warning Light QE This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 14 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System fes ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 15 Tachometer This gauge measures engine re
75. leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole 1 when the vehicle is in a level position Oc e A i OZO Q Q HO 81c4392f Drain amp Fill Plugs Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 Draining Fluid First remove fill plug 2 then drain plug 3 Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs You could damage them and cause a leak Lubricant Selection Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the fluid becomes contaminated with water Change the fluid immediately if contaminated with water Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check The lubricant level should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Lubricant Selection Use only manufa
76. located on the climate control switch bank Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The defroster turns off automatically after approximately 10 minutes of operation for the first push of the button and will turn off after approximately five minutes for the second push of the button CAUTION e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED NOTE Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used with vehicles equipped with Skyslider The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached NOTE Crossbars are offer
77. may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC switch bank below the climate controls 150 Watt maximum power outlet located on the back of the center console This outlet can power small appli ances and electronic devices 115 Volt 150 Watt Power Outlet Control Switch Press and release the switch once to turn on the power aE outlet A status indicator in the switch will illuminate in 115 Volt 150 Watt Power Outlet approximately one second to indicate that power is es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 CUPHOLDERS In the center console there are two cupholders for the front seat passengers available at the outlet Press and release the switch again to turn off the power outlet The status indicator will also turn off NOTE Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC 150 Watt maximum power rating is exceeded WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Front Cupholders 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the STORAGE cens conde Front Storage Compartment The front storage compartment located on the left side of the instrument panel can hold cell phones PDAs and other sm
78. most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Towing with HSA Disabling and Enabling HSA HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the incline while towing a trailer current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Hill Start Assist e If you use a trailer brake controller with your under Personal Settings Customer Programmable trailer the trailer brakes may be activated and Features under Electronic Vehicle Information deactivated with the brake switch If so there may Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual not be enough brake pressure to hold both the m vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the pedal is released In order to avoid rolling down following steps an incline while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle str
79. not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Tip Start Feature Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If Engine Fails to Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in
80. off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when the turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped 40 To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on the end of the multifunction lever Front Fog Light Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever upward or downward and the corresponding turn signal indicator on the instru ment panel will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights L 034406007 Turn Signal Control You can signal a lane change by moving the multifunc tion lever upward or downward partially without mov ing beyond the detent 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If either turn signal indicator has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the multifunction lever is moved see your authorized dealer for service High B
81. only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
82. or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations Th
83. overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Auto Sct mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any air delivery point outside or recirculated AIC on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off 81a12736 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so t
84. phone UConnect automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See UConnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or UConnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the UConnect for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the UConnect Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 e Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the UConnect These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are transferred and updated to UConnect on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone UConnect allows the user to download entries from th
85. seam behind the wheel to be changed For the rear tires place it under the axle by the wheel to be changed Position the jack handle on the jack Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 80f354b4 Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 80135497 Front Jacking Location ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ib 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by
86. settings for low speed wiper operation or to S located on the right side of the steering column the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the we Park position if you turn off the ignition switch while they are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the Biedcess windshield wipers may result if the wiper control Windshield Wiper Washer Lever is left in any position other than OFF Continued 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the OFF position If the windshield wiper control is turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind shiel
87. should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 366 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Use the following guidelines to maintain your vehi cle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or ma
88. simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back i
89. speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in or in REVERSE You could lose control of the severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Tow vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift ing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in into gear when the engine is idling normally and Section 6 of this manual when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal E DRIVE REVERSE For most city and highway driving Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a gt Second complete stop For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pave NEUTRAL ment or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear Move the shift lever into this gear only after the vehicle with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd has come to a complete stop Always depress and main gear tain firm pressure on the brake pedal while in this range 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 1 First For hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled 4th speed OVERDRIVE The trans mission will automatically shift from 3rd gear to OVER DRIVE if the following cond
90. that are based on collision severity and occupant size The front passenger airbag is also certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification refer to information on Occupant Classification System in this section This vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags to protect the driver and the front and rear passengers sitting next to a window They are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 8192b898 Window Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front and side curtain airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason C
91. that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to resto
92. the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the BRAKE warning light shows system failure es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 WARNING Continued e Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling point than the recommended product or a brake Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS spe
93. the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the Hazard Warning flasher switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an aereas emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped put transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act JACKING AND TIRE CHAN
94. the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury Since 4 wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road con ditions permit You or others could be injured ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Shift Positions 4WD Lock The electronic transfer case switch is located on the center 4 Wheel Drive High Range Locks the front driveshaft console next to the shift lever and rear driveshaft together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose or slippery road surfaces only 4WD Low 4 Wheel Drive Low Range Low speed 4 wheel drive locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Biceeeha Neutral Disengages both the front driveshaft and rear 4WD Control Switch driveshaft from the powertrain To be used for flat 2WD towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Rear Wheel Drive High Range Normal street and Towing in this section for more information highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 302 STARTING AND OPERATING M Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
95. the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE ERM is disabled anytime the ESP is in Full Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 the engine power will be reduced and you will feel the WARNING brake being applied to individual whe
96. this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D E In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 471 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a se
97. to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle Enabling and Disabling the System There are times when you may want to disable the Rear Park Assist System such as when towing a trailer Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off through the EVIC For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Vehicles Equipped with Rear Park Assist Switch You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off by pressing the Rear Park Assist switch located the lower switch bank below the climate controls ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Rear Park Assist Switch System Operation The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia The warning display located above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object HSM Rear Park Assist LED Display The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs one set to warn of
98. to one indicating the change Opera tion on the Low level heating will also turn OFF auto matically after 30 minutes NOTE When a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat Feature To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to position the front seat to its mid track position Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi tioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with se
99. to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift the indicator light for the previous position will remain on and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift move the 4WD Control Switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WD to 4WD Auto Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD Auto can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either OFF or RUNNING This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position 2WD or 4WD Auto to 4WD LOW When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or its occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h using the Preferred Procedure or completely stopped using the Alternate Procedure Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow the vehicle speed to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 3 While still rolling move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is o
100. wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network
101. your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to it s fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper locations 400 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES ME aN STARTING WARNING Continued WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes
102. your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision e Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions and rollover events When the ORC detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle or both sides of the vehicle for a rollover event A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window T
103. 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate I E l i 1 46 Ca Ts are RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Volume control knob a second tim
104. 1 Weak batteries in RKE transmitter The expected life of the batteries is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a targeted range of 328 ft 100 m 81c0daaf Remote Start Button NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start Shift lever in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Liftgate closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice The engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e For security power window operation and sunroof or Sky Slider operation if equipped is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started t
105. 199 Hi Instrument Cluster Descriptions 200 E Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It Equipped occ cag cba eem eme 213 DEVIC Displays oet ev RR ERR kane 214 O Oil Change Required 216 OTrip Functions 6 6 6 ieg eee 217 O Compass Display s ccc cesa ransas aao 218 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features paces Ro Paes ak x de lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack lessen Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play e cess eo eR eue be eas 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play E AM FM CD DVD Multimedia System Radio RER REN If Equipped o Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect It Equipped sc css ped uer P ps a Clock Setting Procedure lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack sess O Operating Instructions Radio Mode O Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files
106. 233 AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2
107. 48 Lights On Reminder 0040 144 ow Fulel 64 4 2 400 8 TRE eae doe toed ed OSS 200 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 202 Map Reading 0 0 ee eee aes 147 Oil Pressure i uud be hae ea hae 204 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 148 Park saci cea gen a wat Bee AM 142 Passing se eatin artis eme que ba T A i 147 Rear Servicing du ios oleae eee a lads ap 447 en INDEX 469 Rear Tail eor OR RUE RUN abge e 447 Seat Belt Reminder 0 4 210 SOLVICE od eg ee ee Phe A Sd idu es 444 445 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 00 202 Side Marker 44 2 zr Rr men 446 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 200 353 Tow Haul Indicator ese serisine reter 205 Traction Control 0 000000 329 332 Transfer Case 24 0 S 6 42 40nG se ete y 302 307 Turn Signal i scs sora es 83 142 145 446 447 Vanity Mirror e tois belesrera e Egeria ps 93 Voltage ee EE EE 203 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 200 Load Floor Cargo 1 ee 184 Loading Vehicle llle 369 Tires gAg nu ge ches SEEDS ENE RSS RRR 338 LOckS5 6 oh ete tee ee ee dee es 29 Auto Unlock id RE RE 32 Automatic Door llle 31 Child Protection 0 0 00 cee eee ae 33 DOOE ss xu ak bodes ade Rhee ee we Owes 29 PowerlDOOrz siebe iem eee xe EY Es 30 Low Tire Pressure System llle 353 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH wrata rasik iss Tega a a
108. 6 Cargo Area Goyer iouis dew noah ESTO RN eee 187 Cargo Area Features ameua die 00 a eee aa iA 184 Cargo Compartment 0000000 184 Light s ues ake ee care ae RS C cae ae wii ds 147 Cargo Light e 22 6 es o nr RE 147 Cargo Load Floor llle 184 Cargo le Downs ecce erasers ther en 185 Cargo Vehicle Loading sisse 369 Cellular Phone leen 94 Certification Label 0 0 0 0 ee aes 369 Changing A Plat Tie 42262 b desss 393 Chart lire SiZing node e eed era wie ahd 335 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 202 409 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 80 Checks Safety cc asis ie aaa cad Dine 80 Child Restraint lees 70 71 75 77 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 74 75 Child Safety Locks oo asc ab tia ge meme 33 Clean Air Gasoline 0 0 0 000 eee 363 Cleaning Windshield Wiper Blades 417 en INDEX 481 Climate Control wees sie sais ae eee ie aes 272 Clock sere RP erre S 227 242 245 254 Coin Holder esliec ea eee eR be alae os 183 Cold Weather Operation 0 289 Command Trac Operation 04 299 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 271 Compact Spare Tire isses E yw eer ee Eae 345 COmpass 35 238 sed ege Pe b AS RR da 218 Compass Calibration 00006 219 Compass Variance ees 220 Computer Trip Travel 0 0000 217 Console
109. 7 of this manual for more information 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Se P LIQUET eon MOTORHONE ETC CAUTION e The transmission must be in PARK position for recreational towing Failure to follow these proce Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft dures can cause severe transmission and or trans is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground fer case damage while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe Internal damage to the transmission or transfer transmission damage case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Towing 4WD Models Before recreational towing perform the procedure The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL for outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL to be recreational towing The NEUTRAL selection button is certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL located at the top of the 4WD Control Switch Shifts into Otherwise internal damage will result and out of transfer case NEUTRAL can take place with Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar the selector switch in any mode position on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 WARNING 4 Depress the brake pedal Shift the t ission into NEUTRAL You or others could be injured if you leave the SERUUM IUQUAMIDA SOOO vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the 6 Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar obj
110. AND OPERATING 375 057005577 057005578 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 376 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow This should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratin
111. ARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as sistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To d
112. Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they
113. BE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you
114. CAP message will display in the instrument clus ter Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a tru
115. CoG tee MERE ee UR 352 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 82 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 83 Safety Defects Reporting 472 Safety Exhaust Gas Safety Information Tire 06 333 Safety IPS gong na aE arene ik seal ES tna ta aud 80 Satellite Radio iis kp RR RR bas 264 Satellite Radio Antenna llle 266 Schedule Maintenance seen 453 Seat Belt Maintenance less 437 Seat Belt Reminder seen 48 Seat Bells 442 8 8 044440 Pedal e kp es 41 82 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 46 And Pregnant Women llle 51 Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 00000 70 77 Extend et 24 x De deba d Shy ea dE es 51 ErontSeat seis wk Redon REX GO OR eA 41 Inspection ex cse oie ae FPR ES ee Bia RAE 82 Pretensioners cera ensaioa a eea 47 Rem ndef o oseere paer iai eme dt Ca ea 210 Shoulder Belt Anchorage lus 46 Untwisting Procedure 494 INDEX ae DEAS M ETT 128 Adjustment ssgd cs2mes7d0 pie RH CREE 128 Cleaning 22 exiens HR ee ERO AES 435 Easy Entry 23 2304 0064 026 tie ea dota RES 139 Head Restraints 0 00 0 ee eee 132 Heated 2 222 bene me es ees 132 Height Adjustment 00 131 Lumbar Support sisse ied bee eee es 130 MemoOoEy x suid Res S Ro a AR RO a 136 POW iare uerba ACER Rd 131 Rear Folding 54 eger etaed dori e A a 133 Reclining 5 2 55 pod
116. D 3 M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down M22 10Amp Right Horn Hi Low Natural ASD 1 and 2 Red M23 10 Amp Left Horn Hi Low Red M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M26 10Amp Power Mirror Switch M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Driver Window Red Controller ORC Switch M33 10 Amp Powertrain Control M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch Red Module PCM Red Wireless Control M34 10 Amp Park Assist Module Module WCM Red if equipped Heating Steering Column Lock Ventilation and Air if equipped Conditioning HVAC M28 10 Amp Powertrain Control Module if Red Module PCM equipped Compass M29 10 Amp Occupant Classifica Module if equipped Red tion Module OCM M35 10Amp Heated Mirrors if M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module Red equipped Blue if equipped M36 Diagnostic Link M31 20 Amp__ Back Up Lights Yellow 44 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description CAUTION Continued a Fuse e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to M3 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating Red tem ABS Electronic The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Stability Program may result in a
117. D PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate RES RSC Radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Volume control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the vol ume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free
118. E STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assem blies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the RELEASE button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2
119. G Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION cause serious injury or death CAUTION ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow The engine block heater warms the engine and permits ing precautions are not observed quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a a complete stop grounded three wire extension cord e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal e The engine block heater cord is found under the hood clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution 292 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
120. GING asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING CAUTION e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you Driving with a hot cooling system could damage You could be crushed Never get any part of your your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops center where it can be raised on a lift back into the normal range If the pointer remains on The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the tires only The jack should not be used to lift the engine off immediately and call for service vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the in the cargo compartment behind a trim cover on the left vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism rear trim panel The latch is located at the bottom of the trim cover Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut located in the rear cargo area inside the v
121. Headlights 4 2 2 erd sans a Ne RE RE es 142 Automatic 486 INDEX ae Bulb Replacement 004 445 CIeanimp ior uen x deter aoe eee nee d 436 Delay 2 4 24 added sse tdt bsug 3 ELE EE 143 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 146 Lights On Reminder 004 144 On With Wipers 0000004 143 151 Passing xus E aom Roy e insti talise 147 Replacig 239439926 ebiwgeiee diodes 445 DWILGEI oe ot ace dat asd wende enti on E fte se 142 Time Delay s csv Hoe ebbe Gee ed 143 Heated Mirrors llle 93 Heated Seats eee eee 132 Heat r ascgut ganid ORS BERD RESO LEO a 272 Heater Engine Block 00000 291 High Beam Indicator 00000 203 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 146 Hill Descent Control 000 326 Hill Descent Control Indicator 205 326 Hill Start ASSISE ues e exam ER AR 324 Hitches Trailer Towing 1 eee eee 376 Holder COi iie m RR ERR eT Eads 183 Holder Cup 4 4 443 830044 eR Looe ed e 181 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 163 Hood Release lees 140 Ignition 434 2444 PEDG 4e PRI ed RUP a eu 12 Key zukuad aces a hee tica s e T RR a e 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Illuminated Entry 0 000 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key lusus 14 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 0 0c cee aes 70 71 Inflation Pressure Tires llle 343
122. IC if equipped will display which memory position is being set es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph 0 km h to recall a memory profile The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be turned on and off through the EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter to the Memory Feature Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter EC To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the key from the ignition 2 Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then within five seconds press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the EVIC if equipped 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Your R
123. ING How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced Automatic Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensi if the seat belt assembly automatic locking retrac tive emergency locking mode tor feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force
124. INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton a with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing tim
125. Information Center Vehicle iss 213 Inside Rearview Mirror less 90 Instrument Cluster lesen 199 200 Instrument Panel and Controls 198 Instrument Panel Cover sess 436 en INDEX 487 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 437 Integrated Power Module Fuses 438 Interior Appearance Care 0005 436 Interior Lighting 000 142 147 Interior Lights sete em RR RR e 148 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 150 Introd cton u a dpt a Sea ees wa bx 4 Inverter Power llle 180 Jack Location 2 2 gs e Ren 394 Jack Operation en erm oa 393 396 Jacking Instructions llle 396 JUMP Starine ice dus eiie e de RUP ded 400 Key Programming lese 16 Key Replacement 0 0 0 0 0 0c ee eee 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 14 Key In Reminder soseri sanassa irante waa 14 Keyless Entry System scio ea ai e b E 20 KEYS mionario ie Oa Gi EAA e ee eg 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 145 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 41 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 4 206240 RR 74 75 Latches 4 ak ats Se ES TREAT ES 83 Hood oeeie 9k pde d e rd oes 140 Lead Free Gasoline 2 0002 eee 363 Leaks Fluid seg Rupe EE eS 83 Life of Tres 4 uu ede eae deiade cd d 349 Liftgate e ercer aktra nga hera oad PRU d 40 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer
126. Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se belt However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough slack to allow you to pass the belt through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Auto matic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the RELEASE button facing out If the belt still can t be tighten
127. Jeep LIBERTY 2009 owner s manual VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution there fore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler LLC Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC
128. KE transmitters can be unlinked to the memory setting by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE e For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi tions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped e For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph 0 km h to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted with the vehicle speed above 0 mph 0 km h a message will display in the EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver one press memory button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press memory button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons S 1 or 2 during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat will stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on wher
129. MS e The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn e The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure e The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven This is normal and there should be no adjust ment for this increased pressure ing limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light illuminates you m
130. NDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjust the head re straints so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint However the head restraints may be raised without pushing in the button 81b7959a Adjustable Head Restraint Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats both the front driver and passenger seats The controls for the front heated seats are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Heated Seat Switches After turning ON the ignition press the switch once to select High level heating Press the switch a second time es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut Off the heating elements Amber indicators in the switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicators will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off When High level heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal High level heating If High level heating is selected the system will automatically switch to Low level heating after 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indicator lights changes from two
131. NG YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified in a category other than that of an adult This could be a child teenager or even a small size adult NOTE Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indi cator Light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD Indicator Light is not illumi nated Indicator Light Location The PAD Indicator Light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is prope
132. O mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Set mode knob be
133. Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the Tune Scroll control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above proce
134. Pinch Protect Feature The Sky Slider will retract automatically if it detects an obstruction while closing If this occurs remove the obstruction and use the switch again to close the Sky Slider Slider is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the Sky Slider before closing Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the Sky Slider in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the Sky Slider open adjust the Sky Slider opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sky Slider Maintenance Refer to Sky Slider Top Care under Maintaining Your Vehicle in Section 7 of this manual ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET Your vehicle is equipped with a fused 12 Volt power outlet This outlet is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls It has power available when the ignition switch is in the ON position It can operate a conventional cigar lighter unit or power accessories designed for use with a standard power outlet adapter Front Power Outlet NOTE If desired the instrument panel power out
135. RSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Outside of the vehicle locate the safety latch lever Two latches must be released to open the hood between the grille and hood opening left of center when 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side facing hood AL ae meen then raise the hood of the instrument panel P 816024a0 Underhood Safety Latch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open To prevent possible damage ed uM aq ot e pippo qm IHeihole e Before closing hood make sure the hood prop rod is fully seated into its storage retaining clips push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that e Do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward mm both latches engage e Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before Hood Prop Rod Hole Location driving 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS Exterior and Interior Lighting Control x The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signal lights in strument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights if equ
136. Reinstall the cover with the handle recess facing toward you NOTE You can install the cover with either side facing upward 5 With the cover seated in the floor pull upward on loops and twist them one quarter turn so that they are no longer parallel to the slots in the cover 6 Flip the loops down WARNING A loose storage bin cover thrown forward in a colli sion or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always latch the storage bin cover to the cargo load floor with the spring loaded latches when not accessing the storage bin Cargo Tie Down Hooks and Loops The tie downs located on cargo area floor should be used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving Cargo Tie Down Hooks 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Cargo tie downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a tie down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Cargo Tie Down Loops e Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de scribed on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Cargo tie down loop
137. S and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc AM FM CD DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Multimedia system REN or Navigation RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Clock Setting Procedure Global Positioning System GPS RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen w
138. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION uera onm Um ore ie RU Im eR o RU ies QUSS NU Me Ie cn RR S VU SCR 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ce ccceccccecccecccecccs 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 cc ccc cece mnt 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL cce eeeeeeeee eee hh nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc cece ccc c cere were were eee eee hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 0 cece cee cece cece cere hh hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE eeeeeeeeeeseeos ntn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES eeesecstecsieeviecevsieesieevseeeceicetesieecece 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE eeeeeeeeeeeee ehh hh hh hn 10 INDEX 5 33 3 9 53 3 98 379 X337 9 30808 disa US a RT C3 tia 873 RR URL RU ideiei diakona 8 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS W introduction 0 0 00 0000000 4 warnings And Cautions 0 0 7 l Rollover Warning dose eek bee hm 4 Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manual 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the in
139. Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you
140. T RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Co
141. TE The transmission and transfer case must be in NEUTRAL under any towing condition Model Flat Towing all four wheels ON the ground Flat Bed Towing Recommended Method Front Wheels Rear Wheels Raised Raised Rear Wheels Front Wheels on the on the Ground Ground 2 Wheel Drive Rear driveshaft removed All four wheels sus pended OFF the ground Speed less then 30 mph 48 km h and distance less Speed less then 30 mph 48 km h and distance less then 15 miles 24 km then 15 miles 24 km 4 Wheel Drive Yes All four wheels sus pended OFF the ground NOT Recommended NOT Recommended MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Engine Compartment 3 7L 407 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 408 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 408 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Progr ms le 409 la Replacement Parts cess een x9 410 W Dealer Service llli 410 Bl Maintenance Procedures nonna anaana aaa 411 D Engine Oil ceder ERO educ E RR 411 Engine Oil Filter 5 size m 413 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Lus 414 Maintenance Free Battery 414 Air Conditioner Maintenance A C Air Filter If Equipped Body Lubrication lesse Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid 417
142. TING 361 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle In addition the EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 4 The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to remind you to service the flat tire NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not m
143. The MP1522 Command Trac transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the speed of the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front wheels or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Continued 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued WARNING The 4WD LOCK position and 4WD LOW position e You or others could be injured if you leave the are intended for loose or slippery road surfaces only Driving in these positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD position or 4WD LOCK position at a given road speed Take care not to over speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles de pends on tires of equal size type and circumfer ence on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Always engage
144. UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding p
145. UIPPED The Rear Park Assist System is a driver aid that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle and provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the Rear Park Assist System operating prop erly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the Rear Park Assist System When you turn off the Rear Park Assist System the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED Furthermore once you turn off the Rear Park Assist System it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and the Rear Park Assist System is turned off a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle and the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED The Rear Park Assist System when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone If a Rear Park Assist System malfunction occurs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 EVIC will display SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYS TEM and the LED in the Rear Park Assist switch will CAUTION Continued e Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths
146. W SE and SW and the outside temperature ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system conveniently allows the driver to select a EVIC IF EQUIPPED variety of useful information by pressing the switches The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the tures a driver interactive display that is located in the following instrument cluster e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System if equipped e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display Outside temperature display Trip computer functions A A M edipned MET e Navigation system screens if equipped Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Audio mode display 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System MENU Status Personal Settings Button Press and release the MENU button and the Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus SCROLL tomer Programmable Features Button QD Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outsi
147. a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4WD LOW Range When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warra
148. a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of desired radio station presets The memory switch is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column The switch contains an S button to activate the memory save function It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number 1 and the number 2 The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of the two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate side of the switch Programming The Memory Feature To create anew memory profile perform the following NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory 1 Turn the ignition ON 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 within five seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position is being set If desired a second memory profile can be stored into memory as follows 1 Turn the ignition ON 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 2 within five seconds The EV
149. able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different then the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station
150. adlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Section 4 of this manual 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer control lever to one of the five intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the windshield wiper washer control lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive Choose position 3 for normal rain conditions Choose position 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity Choose position 4 or 5 if you desire more sensitivity Place the lever in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The rain sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the LOW or HIGH position e The rain sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain senso
151. aight forward Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury 3 Apply the parking brake NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 4 Start the engine 5 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 6 Press the ESP OFF button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within twenty seconds The ESP TCS Indicator light should turn on and turn off two times 7 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional one half turn to the right 8 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 9 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting HDC Hill Descent Control If Equipped HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary When enabled HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descending a hill HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1st 1 mp
152. al llle 430 Rear Park Sense System 00005 158 Rear Seat Folding lessen 133 Rear Window Defroster 00055 191 Rear Window Features 0 0000 eee 190 Rear Wiper Washer 0 0000000 e ee 190 Rearview Mirrors llle 90 Reclining Front Seats 0000000 129 Recreational Towing 0 0000 e ee 386 Reformulated Gasoline llus 363 Refrigerant iaces de d eere e EEG dU die Y 416 Release Hood 0 cee ee eee 140 Reminder Lights On s seretii seitset eti 144 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 00 0c eee 48 Remote Control Starting System 26 ee ees 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 270 Remote Starting System llis 27 Replacement Bulbs 0000006 444 en INDEX 493 Replacement Keys e esana sdieri g tanaan a E 16 Replacement Parts erres ti adtadun t Beane ki 410 Replacement Tires 0 0 0 0 00000 ee 349 Reporting Safety Defects 0 472 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 209 216 Restraint Head icc es ace eae ee eb be Rn 132 Restraints Child 0 0 00 00 ee eee 70 Restraints Occupant iss ecelesia 40 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 187 Roll Over Warning 1 0 0 0 0 000000 akati 4 Roof Sky Slider Power 222229 Lo me 173 430 Roof Type Carrier 6 6 ee eee 192 Rotation Tires i vsus erp
153. aling by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly result in engine damage and may decrease corro dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the in an emergency it should be replaced with the proper maintenance intervals specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolan
154. all items Rear Cupholders Front Storage Compartment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Console Storage Compartment The center console has a removable storage tray which To open press the latch and lift the cover can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items Center Console Removable Storage Tray 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Load Floor The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs 181 kg The load floor has a built in storage bin that can hold a variety of items The underside of the storage bin cover also contains a plastic lined tray The cover can be installed with either side facing up for added utility To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room Refer to Seats in this Section for additional information on the 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat feature Accessing the Storage Bin NOTE The spring loaded latches that retain the storage bin cover to the cargo load floor should not be used as cargo tie downs 1 Flip the spring loaded latch pull loops up Cargo Load Floor Loops 2 Pull the loops upward and twist them one quarter turn so that they are parallel to the slots in the storage bin cover 3 Lift the cover upward over the loops es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 4
155. ally update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 Driving th
156. an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up en STARTING AND OPERATING 291 WARNIN
157. ance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or Schedule 150 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule T Rotate tires J Change the engine oil
158. ants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that is will not shift during travel When traile ring cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners
159. anual for system function and operating information To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to HSA Hill Start Assist under Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 of this manual for system function and operating information To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate REQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to
160. aoe Hake a e Rot s 203 Starting 44 des Pete b de d was anie dep es 27 289 Cold Weather sio dp e Be SER Sa 289 Emergency Jump Starting 400 Engine Block Heater 4 291 Engine Fails to Start 2s sei bo ERES 290 Remole i222 n4 pees eee eS EX 27 Starting and Operating 05 289 Starting Procedures 289 Steering POW E i2o3mucade eee ea ced Rex Tani 314 315 Tilt Column aga RE EYE SEES 154 Wheel Tilt iiam Rx REG 154 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls zes sr geiene eee 270 OLOfdge i d dew ede ea REGIOS E AR RE oo 182 Storage Din ece etete dete ead FP PAPE rares 182 Storage Vehicle s ko esed ERR DR e 282 Sun ROOF amp seo wt ERE RP ES 169 Sun Roof Sky Slider Power 173 430 Sun Visor Extension llle 93 Sunroof Maintenance l l lees 172 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 52 Sway Control Trailer ssy ocs tiesai dea iioa a 323 Synthetic Engine Oil ss setetes es rereset sss 413 System Remote Starting llle 27 Tachometer llle 204 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 276 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 207 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 74 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 496 INDEX aaa Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 2 22 185 Tilt Steering Column 0000050 154 Time Delay Headlight sse 143 Ti
161. appears 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and hold the RESET button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Park Assist System If Equipped When on is selected the system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Sec tion 3 of this m
162. are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the indicators appear in replaced two or more adjacent grooves the tire should be re pt placed Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire en STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the origina
163. arm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver ing parking or stopping NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning e Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially WARNING when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can build up between the tire tread and the road This To use your brakes and accelerator more safely hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking follow these tips ability and control After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake damage 320 STARTING AND OPERATING M ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP This system includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Program ESP
164. arranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing 372 STARTING AND OPERATING M Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale WARNING If the Gross Trailer Weight GTW is 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR
165. as of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h manual transmission or when the shift lever is in PARK auto transmission Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the info
166. ase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 383 WARNING Continued Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front 5 of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requ
167. at belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or Lock Your Vehicle out of thearea Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended even in your If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine own driveway or garage Try to park your vehicle ina running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force well lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed value exposed 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the BLOWER switch on the climate control is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposit
168. ats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly To Lower the Rear Seat 1 Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of each rear seatback 2 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle Rear Seat Release Strap 3 Fold the rear seat completely forward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 4 If desired push down on the seatback to lock it in the folded position To Raise the Rear Seat NOTE If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position 1 If locked in the folded position pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle 2 Raise the seatback and lock it into place WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Recliner Adjustment The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger comfort Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear seat to recline the seatback Ms Rear Seatback Release Strap 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through
169. be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky Slider open adjust the sunroof or Sky Slider opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift 022205927 Liftgate Release NOTE Use the power door LOCK switch on either front door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate The manual door locks on the doors and the driver s door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and side
170. be sure the replacement cap is designed for use with this tank filler tube cap gas cap vehicle Continued 368 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued e A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running Continued WARNING Continued e A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gAS
171. c ESP Stability Program ESP is combined with the B Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after the several ignition cycles and the 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sound will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following a maneuver that caused the ESP activation 21 SERV Service 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped The SERV 4WD Indicator Light will turn on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and it will stay on for two seconds If the light stays on or turns on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required SERV 4WD 22 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi RT tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reachi
172. c Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes Press the Tune Scroll control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button ca
173. c number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display t
174. cally transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the PHONE button to begin a e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dia
175. case 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Sg Shift Positions WARNING The electronic transfer case switch is located on the center e You or others could be injured if you leave the console next to the gear selector lever vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury Since 4 wheel drive provides improved traction 4WD Control Switch there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and 2WD stopping speeds Do not go faster than road con Rear Wheel Drive High Range Normal street and ditions permit You or others could be injured highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 81c357ca en STARTING AND OPERATING 307 4WD Auto 4 Wheel Drive Auto High Range This active on demand position makes available optimum traction for a wide range of conditions while maximizing driver con venience This position is always in 4 wheel drive mode with a normal 4276 front axle 5876 rear axle torque split The system also ant
176. certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 473 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153
177. channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone lf Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right controls are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls Right Hand Switch Functions e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volu
178. cifica tion may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Continued 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil fill tube that is sealed and it should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for the correct fluid type Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
179. ck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing i
180. cle r saneras eGo e 81 O Exhaust GaSe ersa a nepr tau ee 81 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These either side up numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the ACC position and then push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position Then remove the key 8165df1a Vehicle Key THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features such as the power window switches radio power sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC features such as the power window switches radio power sunroof or e 020205845 Sky Slider if equipped and power outlets will Ignition Switch Positions remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either 1 Lock 3 On A g
181. cles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed i e func tional RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Flash Lights with Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer P
182. convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay atte
183. ct your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If the previously described arming sequence has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The interior lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open a door This feature also turns on the approach lighting if so equipped For details refer to Illumination Approach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The interior lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON NOTE e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate the interior lights if the dimmer control is in the extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate open the liftgate flip up window or activate the PANIC alarm from distances up to 23 ft 7 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitte
184. cturer s recommended lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the lubricant in stalled at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Lubricant changes are not neces sary unless the lubricant becomes contaminated with water Change the lubricant immediately if contaminated with water Sky Slider Top Care Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance and make successive cleaning easier Do not subject the top to excessive heat Frequently vacuum the top and tracks Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the top and inside of the tracks by hand with a window cleaner or alcohol dampened cloth Washing Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth system is preferred ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 CAUTION Avoid pointing a high pressure hand held spray wand directly at the sides of the top as this can damage the seal and force water past the weather strips General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles If hand washing e Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun e Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top e Wash the top with a soft natural bristle scrub brush and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish was
185. d other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Switch Models without Express Window Feature Press the mirror select button marked L or R and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing Models with Express Window Feature Press and release the mirror select button marked L or R and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing The selec tion will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position following an adjustment NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to return the power mirrors to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for details ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is act
186. d the outside temperature This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North In some are
187. d wiper washer control lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph 16 km h WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Mist Feature Push downward on the windshield wiper washer con trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 81c0cc56 Mist Control Headlights with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The He
188. dangerous electrical system over ESP Module Stop load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it Light Switch indicates a problem in the circuit that must be M38 25 Amp Door and Liftgate corrected Natural Lock Unlock Motors CAUTION REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS e When installing the Integrated Power Module LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Cargo Lights ise 2 a wn ERE VES WERE TL212 2 erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Overhead Console Light PLW214 2A may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Reading Light sess cua cua a ur Ead a WL212 2 Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Headlight ssc is00 civ riteris siperi 9008 H13 Front Park Turn Signal Light 3757AK Front Side Marker Light so scg aiarra usann ss 168 Back Up Light 00 0000 3157K Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL LED serviced at an authorized dealer FoS iehi tede actenus esate eter e H10 9145 License Plate Light 000050 168 Rear Tail Stops xe eR SoA 3157K Rear Turn Signal Light 3757AK BULB REPLACEMENT Headlight 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlight housing to access the headlight bulb lock ring 3 Firmly grasp the lock ring and rotate it counterclock wise to
189. de Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 459 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires d If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary LI Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or Schedule 96 Months Maintenance J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule T Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil J Replace the engine air cleaner filter filter 1 Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary T Rotate tires 1 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine 11 If using your vehicle for any of the L1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes
190. de temperature Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection FUNC TION SELECT Button EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Memory 1 2 Profile Set Memory 1 2 Profile Recall Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not in Park with a single chime automatic transmission Memory System Disabled Vehicle in Motion with a single chime manual transmission Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmission Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in Motion manual transmission Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar with a single chime Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitorin
191. dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages en STARTING AND OPERATING 299 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION MP1522 Command Trac Transfer Case If Equipped Operating Information and Precautions The Command Trac transfer case provides four posi tions e 2 wheel rear drive 2WD High range e 4 wheel drive 4WD High range e Neutral e 4 wheel drive 4WD Low range This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2 wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required select the transfer case 4WD LOCK position or 4WD LOW position This position locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of NEUTRAL CAUTION e Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front wheels or rear wheels are spinning
192. duced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode or the Full Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 322 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase
193. dure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones mm Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Pu
194. e Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DT
195. e horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself To Arm the System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NOTE The system will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the driver s door lock cylinder 3 Close all doors The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming During this period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming process If the system arms successfully the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE For added security whenever the Security Alarm is armed the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped is disabled as well To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung ers or the driver s door lock cylinder will not disarm the system e When the system is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Security Alarm System is designed to prote
196. e odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom eter 26 4WD Indicator Vehicles Equipped with Selec Trac II This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the full time four wheel drive auto mode In this mode the system operates with a normal torque split of 42 front axle and 58 rear axle It can redirect up to 100 of torque to the front or rear axle if necessary 27 Odometer Trip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify the mileage the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed because of repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist messages such as door door ajar gATE liftgate ajar gLASS flip up glass ajar gASCAP fuel cap fault LoW tirE low tire pressure or CHANgE OIL will display in the odometer LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Elect
197. e you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 68 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver s seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 23 mm and 68 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on or off through the programmable features in the EVIC For details refer to Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 140 UNDE
198. e Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec tors disconnected for prolonged periods e Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions e Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Cooling System WARNING e You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C condenser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum se
199. e TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 2 2 2 eee KR55120123 Canada fin designs sil as ae aes SAX 2671 5120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800diab6 line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at STARTING AND OPERATING 363 high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufac
200. e display to a small CD playing time display 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nmm e Level 2 31 includi
201. e following beep say Eee eyen pompei ey EIS EDOUES Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say Select or Delete Also see The selected phone will be used for the next phone the next two sections for an alternate way to select call If the selected phone is not available the or delete a paired phone UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users
202. e ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 28 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE Tris indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 29 Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows automatic transmission shift lever selection 30 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for several seconds after the A ignition is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled 31 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic S
203. e is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the instrument clus ter Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the trip odometer RESET button
204. e name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete UConnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the
205. e outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System and In stalling Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt in this section for typical installation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a ee THINGS TO KNOW
206. e phone and network and not the UConnect system Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu English Francais See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated with entry is dialed Number is Dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Phonebook Entries Listed eng Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter
207. e same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other Radio Frequency RF electronics will not cause inter ference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sen
208. e tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary O O O Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 458 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter Change the engine oil and engine oil filter a a Rotate tires Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine a a a a Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E
209. e to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This fea
210. e vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual for filter service intervals 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR FS COOL OR COLD HUMID CONDITIONS t PELA dpt VERY HOT ee Open the windows start fhe vehicle Set the Fan control to the high pasitian full clockwise Press e lt bution Set the Mode control at or between i and 54 Sei the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the El bution fo bum recirculese on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the 7 amp 5 button to tum recirculate off and adjust the temperature con nol for comfort If its sunny set the Mode control at or near F and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at ar near 34 i it s sunny set the Mode coniro at or between 57 and A then tum the air conditioning on If ifs cloudy or dark set the Mode con rol at or near 4 and turn the air condi oning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between 39 and Set the Mode contral at or near et E
211. e vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPMS Telltale light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS Telltale light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ME below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wire
212. eam Low Beam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam High Beam Functions es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at High beam and remain on until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the Flash to Pass position for more than 15 seconds the High beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds before activating the Flash to Pass function again Interior Lights Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console and above the rear doors by the grab handles Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned completely upward to the second detent Cargo Light The cargo light is mounted in the headliner above the rear cargo area This light will turn on when you open the liftgate or any door or if you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or rotate the dimmer control on the multifunction lever completely upward to the second
213. eat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel The side curtain airbags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat 4 Do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows Side Remote Acceleration Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Front Acceleration Sensors Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner and Retractor If Present e Occupant Classification System OCS Front Pas senger Seat Only Occupant Classification Module OCM Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines
214. ect to NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the depress the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position four seconds After the shift is complete and the NEU disengages both the front driveshaft and rear drive TRAL light turns on release the NEUTRAL button shaft from the powertrain and it will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position 7 Start the engine The parking brake should always be applied when M m the diiveris not in the vehicle 8 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 9 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure Shifting into NEUTRAL that there is no vehicle movement Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing 10 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 with the transmission in DRIVE 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 11 Shut OFF the engine 2 Shut OFF the engine 12 Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF posi tion 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position M 13 Shift the transmission into PARK 388 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 14 Attach the vehicle to a tow vehicle with a tow bar 15 Disconnect the battery negative cable NOTE Steps 1 through 5 are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button or while the shift attempt is in process then the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until al
215. ed or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether underneath the headrest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in Tether Strap Mounting a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the i
216. ed by Mopar accessories External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity CAUTION e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos sible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 WARNING Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel Features 198 WM Instrument Cluster 000005
217. eed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains a speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQ
218. ehicle Use the lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle Jack Storage Location ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 Lowering Raising Spare Tire CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or REVERSE manual transmission 4 Turn the ignition to the LOCK position 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel D615051642 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instruct
219. eir phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Edit UConnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for th
220. els in an attempt to Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi stop the trailer from swaying tions and driving conditions influence the chance t d NOTE The TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM Electronic the Partial Off mode and Full Off mode Roll Mitigation cannot prevent all wheel lift or WARNING rollovers especially those that involve leaving the e Trailer Sway Control TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommenda tions Refer to Vehicle Loading and Trailer Towing in this section for more information be roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others fore towing a trailer with your vehicle If TSC activates while towing a trailer stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer TSC activates automatically once the excessively swaying trailer is recognized When TSC
221. em with operator input Other sensors take account of ve hicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature Using all of these inputs the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature air flow distribution airflow volume and the amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will main mm tain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O Off position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUT
222. ency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds mm The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL contr
223. eneral Information 4 26 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 27 o How To Use Remote Start 27 li Door Locks 4 2225 2 2a32i08 50e2352a304 29 O Manual Door Locks 0 05 29 o Power Door Locks nananana nanana 30 a Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOOS 2 935 satis abe eS WaT RE ES 33 Ba Windows M 9E pee a cm eas 35 O Power Windows llle 35 H Wind Buffeting xeu RR EN Rs 39 Ia Li voee CERA EN ERA S 40 Bl Occupant Restraints ssl 40 Lap Shoulder Belts pettis rtd trereres 41 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 47 Seat Belt Pretensioner If Present 47 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAleri9 ouch eae aaa we 48 Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped 49 Energy Management Feature 50 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 51 peat Belt Extender ssa rs ere eaa 51 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag 52 Child Restraint 2er E pax reg 70 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 80 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The ately TiS Mr 80 VElidlSoensippssspeudiaueusikedsdese quique B 3T ne P 80 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make B MM Aid MM C M E Outside The Vehicle o oo aaao 83 A Lock Your Vehi
224. equence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TIME Button Auxiliary Mod
225. er prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take yo
226. er engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding 1 quart 0 9 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recom mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been
227. er should always ride buckled up in the rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arms If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint refer to information on Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved WARNING back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all door Always wear your s
228. erchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the screw from the RKE transmitter case if equipped 2 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmit ter case apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 7 Separating Case Halves 81182072 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together 5 Reinstall and tighten the screw until snug if equipped General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions
229. ersonal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Continued Manual Lock Plunger 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on each of the front door trim panels Use this switch to lock or unlock the i doors and liftgate Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the f
230. es which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you
231. ese practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one ha
232. essure Safety WARNING e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Overinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 WARNING Continued e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Underinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire press
233. ete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate
234. excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Polo SERRE O Inside Day Night Mirror o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped D Outside Mirrors 0 0 00 eee eee O Power Mirrors llle o Heated Mirrors If Equipped o Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped lll Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped ia slate ate meth qus 90 91 92 93 93 Operation ua cu erue eati ase alea Phone Call Features 00 UConnect System Features Advanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System
235. experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Performance is maximized under e low to medium blo
236. ey to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF 7 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure
237. eys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and liftgate flip up window for unautho rized entry and ignition for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will sound the horn intermittently flash the headlights and tail lights and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the instru ment cluster NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming of the System If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off th
238. f folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH C
239. fied by the selector switch 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into DRIVE 10 Set the parking brake 11 Shift the transmission into PARK NOTE Steps 1 through 6 are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button or while the shift attempt is in process then all of the mode position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch in not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 392 Spare Tire Removal 4 394 Bi Your Engine Overheats 2 coca cca ences 392 Preparations For Jacking H Jacking And Tire Changing 393 Jacking Instructions 000 ujack Location 2s4csonrdeectecutseass 394 ilump Starting 6 ctia dnd oreet n O Spare TireStowage sls 394 lll Towing A Disabled Vehicle 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank below
240. g System in Section 5 of this manual Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual e Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual e Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 of this manual for more details e Service Park Assist System with a single chime e Oil Change Required with a single chime Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance
241. g excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual Towing Tips TOW HAUL To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing press the TOW HAUL button when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Automatic Transmission in this section for additional information Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in NEURAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Refer to Cooling System under Maintenance Pro cedures in Section
242. g retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a coll
243. gain pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes redial previous record again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition system allows you to e control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When you press the VR hard key you wil
244. ge to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you
245. gs towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model Frontal Area Max GTW Tongue Wt See Note Transmission Gross Trailer Wt 3 7L Automatic 4x2 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 lbs 91 kg 3 7L Automatic 4x4 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 lbs 91 kg 3 7L Automatic 4x2 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg w Cooler 3 7L Automatic 4x4 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg w Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section 378 STARTING AND OPERATING M When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight GTW between 3 500 Lbs 1 588 kg and 5 000 Lbs 2 268 kg The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine transmission combinations ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch Engine Model Frontal Area Max GTW Tongue Wt See Note Transmission Gross Trailer Wt 3 7L Automatic 4x2 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg w Cooler 3 7L Automatic 4x4 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg w Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speed
246. h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 sec onds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within
247. h 1 5 km h 2nd 3 mph 4 5 km h DRIVE 7 5 mph 12 km h REVERSE 1 mph 1 5 km h NEUTRAL 3 mph 4 5 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 However the driver can override HDC operation by applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed NOTE HDC is available on vehicles equipped with the MP1522 transfer case The transfer case must be in 4WD LOW range to enable HDC HDC is enabled only when the Hill Descent Control Indicator light in the instrument cluster is on solid HDC will NOT activate when the automatic transmis sion is in PARK HDC will NOT activate on level ground e HDC will NOT activate at vehicle speeds above 30 mph 50 km h The Hill Descent button is located in the lower switch bank below the climate control Hill Descent Button 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Enabling HDC 1 Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW i LN range Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section for transfer case operation infor mation 2 Press the Hill Descent button The Hill E e Descent Control Indicator light in the instru ment cluster will turn on solid NOTE If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range the Hill De
248. h an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof NOTE To ensure the sunroof is fully closed press and hold the switch until the sunroof has completely stopped moving Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof
249. h tire with the low tire pressure values flashing STARTING AND OPERATING 359 81826bed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will 360 STARTING AND OPERATING ME turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following en STARTING AND OPERA
250. hat they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level Js Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor uf Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Gye Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost Sv Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air con ditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control rec
251. he fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Air Filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts on air coming from outside th
252. he airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components or assembly 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way e At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler LLC Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly or its related com ponents may inadvertently change the airbag deploy ment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death o
253. he transmission fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops light turns on safely pull over and stop the back into the normal range If the pointer remains on vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 25 Trip Odometer Button Changing the Display Press and release this button once to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it again to change the display from Trip A to Trip B On vehicles equipped with a Base Cluster press and release it once again to display the outside temperature On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster press and release it once again to display the outside temperature and com pass heading in the screen below the speedometer Refer to Vacuum Fluorescent Display for details Resetting the Trip Odometer Display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approxi mately two seconds until the display resets to 0 Th
254. here the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting
255. hing soap Do not use detergent Scrub in all directions covering an area of about two square feet at a time Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces Allow the top to dry before opening Vacuuming the top with a wet dry shop vacuum will decrease the tops drying time ensure removal of all dirt and delete streaks in the material Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stub born stains If stains persist contact your local autho rized dealership for further suggestions 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches Cleaners should not contain silicones organic sol vents petroleum distillates or plasticizers Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before opening it Additional Cleaning Procedure For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn stains apply MOPAR Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner to the complete stain extending 2 in 50 mm beyond the stain With a soft bristle brush scrub in all directions over the stain Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the area with warm water If the stain is still apparent repeat the cleaning procedure When the stain is no longer showing rinse the complete top with warm water Let the top dry before opening it Protection For appearance purposes you may wish to protect the acrylic cloth
256. hone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the UConnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your
257. horized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 6 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of ir an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the MIL flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 7 High Beam Indicator E This indicator shows that the headlights are on m high beam Pull
258. i Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 455 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 456 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires d If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary d Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace
259. iator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to
260. icipates and prevents slip by redirect ing torque as necessary up to 10076 to the front or rear axle if needed 4WD Low 4 Wheel Drive Low Range Low speed 4 wheel drive locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral Disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for more information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The 4WD indicator lights are located in the instrument cluster The NEUTRAL indicator light is located on the 4WD Control Switch If there is no indicator light on or flashing the transfer case position is 2 wheel drive 2WD If the indicator light is on the desired position 4WD AUTO 4WD LOW or NEUTRAL has been ob tained If One or More Shift Requirements are not met e An indicator light will flash e The transfer case will not shift 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE The SERV 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up or it illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Shifting Procedures NOTE If any of the requirements
261. ide window demist outlets e Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost Floor or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary e Recirculation Control Use this button to block the flow of outside air from coming into the passenger compartment A light will illuminate when the system is in recirculation mode Only use the recirculation mode as a temporary means to block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 NOTE e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside beca
262. ider must close fully before opening it from the opposite end Closing the Sky Slider Using Automatic Mode Press and release the button in the center of the switch and the Sky Slider will close automatically from any position The Sky Slider will close fully and stop automatically Using Operator Mode Press the switch rearward and hold it and the Sky Slider will move forward Press the switch forward and hold it and the Sky Slider will move rearward For either operation the Sky Slider will close fully and stop automatically unless you interrupt the operation by releasing the switch To resume the operation from a partially closed position press and hold the switch once again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the Sky Manually The Sky Slider drive motors are mounted to the roof above the cargo lamp In the event that your vehicle losses battery power you can close the Sky Slider by turning the drive gears in the appropriate motor with a 6 mm Allen wrench To do so you must first remove the cargo lamp from the headliner Then insert the wrench into the Allen shaped hole in the appropriate motor and turn the wrench clockwise until the top closes completely The left motor facing forward will close the top when it is open from the rear of the vehicle The right motor will close the top when it is open from the front of the vehicle Anti
263. if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Resiraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81bcd6b2 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
264. igh range e 4 wheel drive auto 4WD Auto High range e Neutral e 4 wheel drive 4WD Low range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 This transfer case is intended to be driven in either the 2 wheel drive position 2WD or the 4 wheel drive Auto position 4WD Auto for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads For added capability when traversing steep grades rough terrain or extremely poor traction surfaces select the transfer case 4WD LOW position This position locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed while multiplying engine torque Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of NEUTRAL CAUTION e The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose or slippery road surfaces only Driving in this posi tion on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD position or 4WD AUTO position at a given road speed Take care not to over speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles de pends on tires of equal size type and circumfer ence on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer
265. ind a Motor Home naaa 386 en INDEX 497 Disabled Vehicle 0 000000 00 402 Guide i224 S84 pk Say eR teu OE Re ES 377 Recreational esas nee trotian nL REETA 386 Weight 26e EEARR Ee Ries 377 Towing Assistance lees 109 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 386 Traction Control 0 0 0 0 ees 321 Trailer Sway Control TSC 323 Trauer TOWNE e per y ERR S 371 Cooling System Tips 4 silos enn 385 TANCES sorores a wee IAE RAE buen OP ed 376 Minimum Requirements 380 Trailer and Tongue Weight 379 WHINE PP P T 383 Trailer Towing Guide llle 377 Trailer Weight isle Ree RRRIGRERS 377 lransaxl a usccssa m ka ex GC Y EEG 291 Automate ques abe uer du eal EON ERE Xo bn 291 Operation 2e 4o 9 ey xa Reb SPARE 291 Transfer Case cesses CERE WO e das 428 Fluid 132 2cuk Rr RE Pe eS 428 450 Four Wheel Drive Operation 299 Maintenance sse elle 428 TransmussiOTk 1k ned ee ere dU ROS ee X 293 Automatic lt 4b 0 ec e hr m tsedas 293 Fluid seedet Gaetan oa teense Aa Baws 450 Maintenance 00 g eee eee eee 428 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 004 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 22 2 eee eee eee ees 163 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 00004 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Tread Wear Indicators
266. ing to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types become so great that you could not hold the child no of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant matter how strong you are The child and others carriers and convertible child seats could be badly injured Any child riding in your e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up aie to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower
267. ion with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to
268. ioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for
269. ions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 A i a Jack Warning Label 1 Remove spare tire 2 Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket As semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten sion and then to the lug wrench mm 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front tires place it in the notch on the body weld
270. ipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mou
271. ipped T Headlights and Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn the end of the lever to the second detent for headlight operation 57 031406004 Headlight Switch Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position third detent When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System off turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic mode Headlights with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Setti
272. ircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the CONTROL button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the RECIRCULATION button to return to out side air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor de frost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the CONTROL button to blink and then turn off 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Most of the time when in Automatic Ope
273. irements Trailer Lights And Wiring O O Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for 3 Oo mH motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin 157002765 wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness 4 Pin Connector and connector 1 Female Pins 4 Park NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles dm inda 6 Right Sibp Turn wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 384 STARTING AND OPERATING o 64 9 Ww o9 Sh 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes 7 Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps OT HOSES Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range you will want to activate the TOW HAUL feature Refer to Au tomatic Transmission in this section for additional in formation NOTE Using the TOW HAUL feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im prove performance and extend transmission life by re ducin
274. is played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8
275. is in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures en STARTING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your High speed driving with your vehicle at or above authorized dealer for radial tire repairs maximum load is dangerous The added strain on Compact Spare Tire If Equipped your tires could cause them to fail You could have a i The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
276. is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control Electronic Refer to TSC Trailer Sway Control under Electronic Brake Control System in this section for information on this system Trailer Sway Control Mechanical The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most p
277. iscs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot o
278. ision the best Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 2 The seat belt latch plate located on the B Pillar is just 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch above your seatback Grasp the latch plate and pull out plate into the buckle until you hear a click the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate To Buckle Latch Plate 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision Continued WARNING Continued A shoulder belt
279. ither button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
280. itions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL button has not been activated e the transmission has reached normal operating temperature NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into OVER DRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the note under torque converter clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of OVERDRIVE until the transmission cools down After the transmission cools down the transmission will resume normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL bu
281. ivated whenever you turn on the Rear Window Defrost Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated Hands Free Communication UConnect system Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for these ra dios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when
282. l control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill
283. l Lever 05 142 New Vehicle Break In Period 0 80 Occupant Restraints 2 000050 56062838 edtaa es 40 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 363 449 Odometer TED uc gd ka ka oa E dts de ae dna a 208 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 310 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 310 Oil Change Indicator 0 209 216 Oil Change Indicator Reset 209 216 Oil ENGINE e 2k RR ee acias 411 449 Capacity toon sessi eeu code eeu 448 Change Interval 04 209 216 412 Checking i422 a ngos ae eb 411 en INDEX 491 Dipstick sic eme ae Ae s ER ege sols 411 Disposal eis ap ankiaineiae inde Going ERE eS 413 lylir JM Pc 413 449 Filter Disposal ens re RES 413 Identification Logo llle 412 Materials Added to iilis 413 Recommendation l l 412 448 Synthetic sese spit cae pad inie ca dadda des 413 VISCOSILY cis ck ees SOR Pe RU ee 412 448 Oil Filter Change 23 erise Eee hes eee ERES 413 Onboard Diagnostic System 408 409 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 163 Operating Precautions llle 408 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Outside Rearview Mirrors sse 91 Overdrive i222 be he b E doe 210 296 Overdrive OFF Switch 00005 296 Overheating Engine llle 207 392 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 473 Paint Care zc es esce chee Ae POM EROS 433
284. l hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR hard key listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR hard key while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR hard key and say Help or Main Menu es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Commands The Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail
285. l require ments are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine RUNNING With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK Shifting Out of NEUTRAL Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Reconnect the battery negative cable 3 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position if it has been moved or the engine has been started 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 5 Depress the brake pedal 6 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 7 Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object to depress the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button Release the NEUTRAL button after the NEUTRAL indi cator light turns off approximately one second After the NEUTRAL button is released the transfer case will shift to the position identi
286. lay Options Selecting the DVD Play Options e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and will display the following OFF if equipped e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if subtitles to different subtitle languages that are equipped Sve Er ae E ee SM VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by switch to different audio languages if supported on pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped the disc if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the equipped TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save NOTE changes e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set e Those selecione caw only Pe Made walle playing a defaults according to customer preference DVD 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective
287. lded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Dry with a soft cloth Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM me cover Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse n J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Module Pink if equipped ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J3 40 Amp Rear Do
288. led is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain compani
289. leet off road or frequent trailer towing 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 L CO DL DOLUDZDLULZLDvLDLt oo 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Mainten
290. less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to illuminate or the chime to sound However it will cause a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to display in the EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 5 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of eac
291. let can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A control switch for the outlet is located in the lower Your vehicle
292. lf times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
293. lfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle 81937590 Fuel Filler Cap ADDING FUEL CAUTION Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the Damage to the fuel system or emission control left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged system could result from using an improper fuel
294. lity filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to batter
295. ll anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system ties contact your authorized dealer Continued 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunct
296. llite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding e
297. ls Added llle 365 en INDEX 485 Methanol sssi aiia rales oa bane WE tan es 364 Octane Rating 0008 363 449 Requirements ssis anness papse eee eee 363 Specifications does SPR ee he 449 Tank Capacity Jac ace aon bean Se d 448 Fuel System Caution 0 000000 367 Fueling sos pacar Gah paces de ee pee eR d 367 FUSES soss sdis RE ah RR n ede d ead 4 438 Garage Door Opener Homelink9 163 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 367 408 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 00 200 Gasoline Clean Air llle 363 Gasoline Fuel 0 0 ee eee eee 363 Gasoline Reformulated 363 Gauges Coolant Temperature 207 Fuel i25ekkes4 R9 dle CREE UE bob Iden 200 Odometer s la o ere 208 Speedometer ia ssleeee9 mech vee bs 203 Tachometer lese 204 Gear Ranges 1 eee 294 General Information 17 26 123 362 General Maintenance 00 000 ce eee 411 Glass Cleaning 4 6 dccem re eher EES 437 Gross Axle Weight Rating 370 372 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 369 372 GVWR asas cee bea oe eee Rae ee SS 369 Hands Free Phone UConnect 94 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water au sus 6 00 c eee eee 310 Hazard Warning Flasher 0 392 Head Restraints 00 0 0 eee eee eee 132 Head Rests 0 0 eee eee ee eee 132
298. ls in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tires The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 350 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index
299. me e Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes i e AM FM etc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to the next preset that you have programmed Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD Operation e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track and so forth e Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays
300. mode depress and hold the ESP OFF button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indicator light will illuminate and an ESP OFF message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instrument cluster to turn off this message In this mode ESP and TCS are turned off except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section until 332 STARTING AND OPERATING M the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km k At speeds over 40 mph 64 km k the system automatically switches to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system will return to Full Off mode The ESP TCS Indicator light is always illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF button This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE e Full Off is the only operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW range Therefore ESP system will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD low range or the transfer case is shifted into 4WD LOW range e The ESP OFF message will display and a chime will sound when the shift lever is moved from any position to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was cleared previously WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offe
301. mpact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
302. n If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 034205978 Power Sunroof Switch 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave unattended children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle wit
303. n not flashing shift the transmission into gear automatic transmission Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear automatic transmission NOTE Steps 1 and 2 in the Preferred Procedure and the Alternate Procedure are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in process then the indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry a shift move the 4WD Control Switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing 310 STARTING AND OPERATING M ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them
304. n Rear Wheels only Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains 352 STARTING AND OPERATING M TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram OS570GTT1 These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended tire rotation frequency Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if de sired Also correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TP
305. n be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the dis
306. n disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the Tune Scroll control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the Tune Scroll control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the de
307. nd washer operation Rotate the switch upward to the first detent to activate the rear wiper Rotate the switch upward to the second detent to activate the rear washer The washer will continue to operate until you release the switch Once released the wiper will cycle three times return to the park position and then resume normal operation NOTE The rear wiper will automatically return to the park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while it is operating The rear wiper will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again CAUTION e Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the rear wiper may result if the rear wiper control is left in the ON position Continued es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 CAUTION Continued e In cold weather always turn off the rear wiper switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper freezes to the window damage to the rear wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the rear wiper blade from returning to the park position If the rear wiper control is turned off and the blade cannot return to the park position dam age to the rear wiper motor may occur Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is
308. ndow Fogging 0 66 0 cece eee 283 WindOWS e uegebe aer poe eens IG ARR 35 POWER uisa depen bt ee ag ewe ere ede oo 35 Windshield Defroster 83 274 275 280 Windshield Washers 149 153 417 Fluid 22e REY RE ERR EE ERE 417 NENNEN INDEX 499 Windshield Wiper Blades 4 417 Windshield Wipers 0 0 0 0 00000 e eee 149 Wiper Blade Replacement 417 Wiper Delay eec ege rae Rs 150 Wiper Reat usando RARO ee Ra RR KORR Rd 190 Wipers Intermittent socs aeoea aoaea 150 Wipers Rain Sensitive llle 152 Wrecker Towing m RE RR RES 402 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 435 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or
309. nformation Partial Off 2WD Vehicles and 4WD Vehicles in 2WD and 4WD High Range The Partial Off mode is intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode raises the threshold for TCS and ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF button is located in the lower switch bank below the climate Control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator light will illuminate To turn the ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator light will turn off This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 ESP Off Button NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF button Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off 4WD Vehicles in 4WD High and 4WD Low Range The Full Off mode is intended for off highway and off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions The ESP OFF button is located in the lower switch bank m below the Climate Control panel To enter Full Off
310. ng Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 32 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the vehicle security system is arming and then flash slowly when the system is armed The light will also turn on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned ON 33 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to 9 eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not turn on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 34 Vacuum Fluorescent Display Mid Line And Premium Clusters Only On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster this display shows the compass heading N S E W NE N
311. ng a separator and a three character extension ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 d5 551 92 A13 ga 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MEPG2 Audio 24 2205 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA
312. ng a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 WARNING 23 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily others could be badly burned by steam or boiling s coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range ing System Pressure Cap paragraph CAUTION 24 Transmission Temperature Indicator If Equipped This light indicates that t
313. ng seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 4 Occupant 1 200 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 342 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pr
314. ng that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automati
315. ngs Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 Headlight Time Delay If Equipped This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area It provides the safety of headlight illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the igni tion switch to the LOCK position To activate the delay turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights Only the headlights will illuminate during this time If you turn the headlights or parking lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Delay Turning Headlights 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Off Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at DRL lower inten sity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is
316. ning account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Sate
317. nitial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Proce dures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING Exhaust Gas WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and se
318. not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three mm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio
319. nted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings D The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pres sures the system will automatic
320. ntion to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files D
321. nty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in 22 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine transmission axle transfer case to assure they have not been contaminated Con taminated fluids and lubricants milky foamy in appear ance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage 312 STARTING AND OPERATING M Driving In Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additiona
322. o 407 Coolant Antifreeze llle 421 449 Cooling deep dub sa WT ale ee Py ES 421 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 81 366 Fails t0 Start 1 5 d pura Bek Sed ede pr S 290 Flooded Stating us ere erede a 290 Fuel Requirements lees 363 Jump Stating xoc scoi vd dox arbe tee dos 400 Oll zi ru anro aves aui aoe Ka das Un i 411 448 449 Oil Change Interval 209 216 412 Oil Filler Capi vcs cese eee die TR 412 OIL Filt r 2 kk a eee aeons RE EG 413 Oil Filter Disposal lessen 413 Oil Select Ones ces oy noes ga Spar cades 412 448 Oil Synthetic 6 vo aes Y ADE cies he bs 413 Overheating oss ay dt aes aed Same eats 392 DATING saioa oe ges he RENE C EE REOR 289 Temperature Gauge 000 207 Engine Oil Viscosity sapere koores esmae as 412 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart eccess ses essaies 412 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 66 Entry System Illuminated 19 Ethatiol edem udo cud ed LE 364 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 81 366 419 Exhaust System sacrae ana kai E E 81 418 Exterior Finish Care 0 0 0 0 0c eee 433 Exterior Lights 00 0000 83 Fabric Care icy ccd gos hay e p TRE DE REX 435 436 Filler Location Fuel lille 367 Filters Air Cleaner ss 4 04 oie care REG ERROR RE La 414 Air Conditioning 02455 cc a axes 283 416 HO 484 INDEX MM Engine Oll ze i ee Ry oem ees 413 449 Engine Oil Disposal
323. o a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are
324. o this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage d
325. obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When the ignition is turned to the ON position and the system is enabled the warning display will turn on all of its LEDs for approximately one second Then the system dimly illuminates the two inner most LEDs when it is detecting no obstacles WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES The Rear Park Assist System is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the system is enabled and the driver shifts the transmission into the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER Inner LED 79 in 200 cm Yellow Sounds for 1 second 1st LED 51 in 130 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 45 in 115 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 4th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm Yellow None 5th LED 20 in 50 cm 28 in 70 cm Yellow None 6th LED 16 in 40 cm 20 in 50 cm Red Intermittent 7th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red Continuous ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 G
326. ocket assembly from the fog light housing 4 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace ment bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the fog light housing and rotate the connector clockwise to lock it in place 6 Close the hood es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Back Up Lights 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the screws that fasten the taillight housing to the vehicle 3 Pull the taillight housing straight back to separate it from the vehicle 4 Disconnect the electrical connector 5 Remove the two screws that fasten the back plate to the taillight housing 6 Separate the back plate from the taillight housing 7 Pull the appropriate bulb s out of the back plate and insert the replacement bulb s 8 Install the back plate and screws into the taillight housing 9 Connect the electrical connector 10 Install the taillight housing and screws 11 Close the liftgate 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 19 5 Gallons 73 8 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters Cooling System 3 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine C
327. of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure e Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Continued e Unlocks the doors automatically NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad e Do not place or hang any items such as add on vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili video players on the front passenger seatback The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classi fication System to be unable to classify the front seat passenger correctly This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to te
328. ol knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type in li No program type or puce None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Prog
329. ollowing conditions are met L 6 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h The throttle is pressed The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission is in
330. ollowing the 1 US DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load maneuver that caused the ESP activation dards Code TIN f 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 334 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE
331. ome loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint Continued has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restrain
332. on it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post located on the ends of the cover housing into either of the left or the right attachment points shown Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover Then insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle Next grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attachment posts on both ends of the cover into the notches in the trim panels Then lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped The Rear Window Wiper Washer control is located on the right side of the steering column 81c0cc61 Rear Window Wiper Washer Control The rotary ring switch on the lever controls rear wiper a
333. on on remote start operation Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN To unlock the steering column push the control handle This feature allows you to tilt the steering column downward To tilt the steering column move the steering upward or downward The tilt control handle is located wheel upward or downward as desired To lock the below the steering wheel at the end of the steering steering column in position pull the control handle column upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The tilt adjustment must be locked while driving Adjust ing the steering wheel while driving or driving without the tilt adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Tilt Steering Control Handle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED To Activate When engaged the Electronic Speed Control
334. onitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 362 STARTING AND OPERATING M 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS Telltale light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for th
335. ontinued WARNING Continued e Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during inflation Along with the seat belts the front airbags provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side Curtain Airbags also work with seat belts to im prove occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe collisions The Side Curtain Airbag will also trigger on the crash side of the vehicle in moderate to severe side collisions or on both sides of the vehicle in rollover collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has particularly if the Occupant Classification System has determined the pas senger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in a category other than that of an adult refer to information on Occupant Classification System in this section This could be a child teenager or even a small size adult Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and young
336. oolant 5 14 Quarts 13 3 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 04884899AB or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L Engine 87 Octane 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Front Axle SAE 80W 90 Multi Purpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
337. oor opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to compl
338. operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Ml Chrysler LLC Rh 81 326 0941 First Edition Printed in U S A
339. opular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When 374 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Continued with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information 057005576 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect ee STARTING
340. or Modules J11 Green J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node Yellow IOD White J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node Green Defogger if White equipped J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys J15 Green tem ABS Pump ESP J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid if equipped Green n 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control Pink tem ABS Valve ESP Blue Module PCM Trans if equipped mission Relay J8 40 Amp Power Seats if J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Green equipped Yellow J9 40 Amp PZEV Flex Fuel if J20 30 Amp Front Wiper Green equipped Pink J10 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J21 20 Amp Front Washer Rear M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 ci Blue Washer if equipped Yellow gar lighter Rain Sen J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module if sor if equipped White equipped Trailer Tow if M 15 Amp Stop Light Switch equipped Blue Feed Center High M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Mounted Stop Light Yellow BATT ACC SELECT CHMSL M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seats M2 20 Amp Trailer Lighting if Yellow if equipped Yellow equipped M9 M3 M10 15 Amp Hands Free Module M4 10Amp Trailer Tow if Blue HFM if equipped
341. ovided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind 2 shield This number also appears on the Automobile Vehicle Identification Number Information Disclosure Label affixed to
342. p a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 470 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with
343. p start 24 44 aces Ew Rene Pn es eem IRR RU 289 Tire and Loading Information Placard 338 Tire Identification Number TIN 337 Tire Markings i300 0004 i5 p00 RR I erts 333 Tire Safety Information 06 333 Tires esae Rene EG RUPEE EY UR PES 83 342 474 Air Pressure 1242 a9 reae dee ig oe d 343 Chain sirada 2dch09 48 Pe Seb ho PPE koi 350 Changing ssim REED wees 393 CompactSpare nessies giaa ee Ee 345 General Information 000005 342 Fgh Speed ute ehh p RR a i ES 344 Inflation Pressures nnana naana 343 Jacking eono are hua AEE TA EA 393 Lite Of Tir s uda REOR RR Cx 349 Load Capacity as eei pe RE CRAT GU 338 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 353 Pressure Warning Light lesse 200 Quality Grading lt s cores o ERR ea 474 RACIAL oars a buo aud wile ace alin a a aca Uo was 345 Replacement asc tw x erc e ep aces 349 Rotation 2k RR HR rd RR RP pius 352 DAY 2 999 Gad PP RS 9d EP Ru hg ed 333 SIZES wand RUE S ean panna a ON tere S DE 335 Spare Tife iiae4e de ra xp e kadetea di 394 SPINNING uxo eder eno Oe der abo WR da d 347 Tread Wear Indicators 0005 348 lo Open Hood 3 305 oin eq d eater ae his 140 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 379 Torque Converter Clutch 04 298 Tow Haul Indicator Light 205 MO WANS os cd a e Ua eobebati d ei eft Pado atte 371 24 Hour Towing Assistance 109 Beh
344. pening the Sky Slider when damp wet or dirty can cause stains mildew and damage to the soft Sky Slider Usage Precautions top material and the inside of your vehicle Make sure the Sky Slider is dry before opening Always close the Sky Slider when leaving your vehicle so as not to leave the interior exposed to potentially damaging outdoor conditions NOTE e The system prohibits Sky Slider operation when ambient temperature is at 4 F 20 C or lower e The system prohibits Sky Slider operation at vehicle Do not leave the Sky Slider open for several speeds of 86 mph 138 km h or above weeks at a time Close it occasionally to prevent discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow Opening and closing the Sky Slider consecutively the creases to smooth out This is especially im without the engine running may run the battery down portant if the Sky Slider was opened when not CAUTION completely dry Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage e Never attempt to open or close the Sky Slider i theSky eee vehicde contents And ee hicle interior when it is frozen Wait until the Sky Slider is thawed before operating Continued WARNING e In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with the Sky Slider open Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Before operating the Sky Slider make sure tha
345. perate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for the Electronic Speed Control to set e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET DECEL lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you cancel or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deacti vate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory NOTE For vehicles equipped with a manual transmis sion depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever up and release Resume Accel and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h sp
346. perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M
347. placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a biton the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is Removing Slack From Belt comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle will withdraw any slack in the belt The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFOR
348. press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle ma
349. r The RKE transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system However the line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects when using the RKE transmitter NOTE Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis ables all buttons on the RKE transmitter 8165df1a Vehicle Key To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illumi nated entry system will also turn on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK bu
350. r 1991 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OC NEVER EXCEED XXX ORTA P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 P 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to
351. r e aE 74 75 Lubrication Body i i s 417 Luggage Cartier ess cegatan ae i apa eee Si 192 Lumbar Support 23e bdo vs 130 Maintenance Free Battery 04 414 Maintenance General 000000 eae 411 Maintenance Procedures 000005 411 Maintenance Schedule ss 453 Maintenance Sunroof llle 172 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 202 409 Manual Service lees 473 490 INDEX ee Manual Transmission Lubricant Selection 0 0 00 0000 450 Map Reading Lights 04 147 Marker Lights Side 0 00000 000 446 Master Cylinder Brakes 04 426 Memory Feature Memory Seat 136 Memory Sat iius tue oe peoka e ERR Qed ae RR A a 136 Memory Seats and Radio 136 Methanol eee 364 Mini Irip Computer lt res css 2440 ac rey ia 217 Mit EOES amp aire y bia Re as bee Ge oe BR RRS Ge a 90 Automatic Dimming llle 90 Electric Powered llle 92 Electric Remote 0 0c eee ene 92 Heated ia und achat wiv aoe baa ale aes 93 Outside sad a edere er oa d XC RR RUE gas 91 Rearview llle 90 Vanity i sve esas mac ee EE Per ER 93 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 353 Mopar Pats i400 52 230 Ges ok bag rx 410 472 MTBE ETBE 24 4444 065d da ERR RR daha os 364 Multi Function Contro
352. r performance e The rain sensing feature can be turned on and off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 The rain sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions e Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C If the wiper control is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing the rain sensing feature will then op erate e Neutral Wipe Inhibit The rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position e Remote Start Wipe Inhibit Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start System The rain sensing feature will not operate when the vehicle is in remote start mode This feature will return to normal operation once remote start mode is exited Refer to Remote Start System in Section 2 of this manual for informati
353. r serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area wi
354. r the floor Manual Seat Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat Seatback Release Lever To recline the seat lean forward slightly and lift the lever Then lean back to the position desired and release the lever To return the seatback to its normal upright posi tion lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
355. r working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO Refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the cataly
356. ram Type dis n Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Program Type 16 Ec cd Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between gt ll playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 e DVD P
357. ration Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on th
358. ration you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation mode by pressing the RECIRCULATION button However under certain conditions while in Auto matic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the RECIRCULATION button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into recirculation mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation mode you must first move the Mode Knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the RECIRCULATION button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in t
359. re be low the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above the freezing point before attempting jump start 402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 7 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi lizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 8 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 9 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion Continued WARNING Continued e Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403 TOWING METHODS NO
360. re inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may no
361. re to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Se PARKING BRAKE To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will light To release the parking brake pull up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK Otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle e Always apply the parking brake fully when leav ing sour veldle oft may roll and cause damage or ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the the PARK position Failure to do so may allo
362. red by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability Full Off mode is only intended for off highway or off road use ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com ESP bined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS BAS Malfunction Indicator light and the ESP TCS Indicator light in the instrument cluster both turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both turn off with the engine running If the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator light turns on continuously with the engine running a mal function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS STARTING AND OPERATING 333 system or both If this light remains on after several TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilomters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible 3 to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator light and the ESP BAS Mal function Indicator light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds OSEMGTTS will stop when ESP becomes inactive f
363. release the accelerator pedal after mov ing the 4WD Control Switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 engine either OFF or RUNNING This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position NOTE The 4 wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the original posi tion indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading 4WD Lock to 4WD Low When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or its occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h using the Preferred Procedure or completely stopped using the Alternate Procedure Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow the vehicle speed to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling move the 4WD Control Switch to m the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light i
364. rly seated in the front passenger seat In this case the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs For all other occupants the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See is turned off and it will not inflate If the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off and move the child restraint to the rear seat A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Front Passenger Seat Occupant Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Airbag Status Light Adult OFF ON Grocery Bags Heavy Brief cases and Other ON OFF Relatively Light Objects Empty or Very OFF OFF Small Objects Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult will cause
365. rmation will display in the selected language Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When on is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until On or Off appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock If Equipped When on is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjus
366. rogrammable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm To Unlatch the Liftgate Flip Up Window Press the REAR RELEASE button twice to unlatch the liftgate flip up window WARNING To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Express Down Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
367. ronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then most warnings will display in the EVIC Fuel Cap Fault Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Change Oil Message Base And Mid Line Clusters Only Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following proce dure 1 Turn th
368. rvice contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with mm 472 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and
369. s NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING 379 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 380 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occup
370. s ON not flashing shift the transmission into gear automatic transmission 304 STARTING AND OPERATING M Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Move the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear automatic transmission NOTE Steps 1 and 2 in the Preferred Procedure and the Alternate Procedure are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in process then the indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry a shift move the 4WD Control Switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing MP3022 Selec Trac Ill Transfer Case If Equipped Operating Information and Precautions The Selec Trac II9 active on demand transfer case pro vides four positions e 2 wheel rear drive 2WD H
371. s Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s power window switch has an Auto Up feature Pull the window switch up to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window switch up to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop
372. s are located on the trim panels e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the a cargo area behind the top of the rear seats e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision The cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep WARNING items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the ie liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes in use You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to only not for passengers who should sit in seats and make more room in the cargo area use seat belts 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To install the cover positi
373. s can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change NOTE For best access to the oil filter a drive on hoist should be used instead of a chassis hoist 3 7L Only Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace Ij ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals NOTE Be sure to follow the dusty or off road condi tions maintenance interval if applicable WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high qua
374. scent Control Indicator light will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled Disabling HDC 1 Press the Hill Descent button or shift the transfer case out of AWD LOW range The Hill Descent Control Indicator light in the instrument cluster will turn off Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over steering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over steer or under steer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position STARTING AND OPERATING 329 ESP TCS Indicator Light 1 The ESP TCS Indicator light located in the WARNING m instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle ac
375. se things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts 314 STARTING AND OPERATING M e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
376. search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequ
377. seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When on is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until On or Off appears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When on is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on If the headlights were turned on by this feature they will also turn off when the wipers are turned off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90
378. sess 31 Door Opener Garage 5 kk RE eais 163 DEVifig cx racc IA iore oa deri o Da G 310 Off Pavement sleek mesons ast siss ks 310 Off Road ses a RR RR 310 On Hills iiwse eue dae eesesaetiness 310 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water llle 310 When to Use Low Range 310 Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 178 Electrical Power Outlets 00 178 Electronic Brake Control System 320 Anti Lock Brake System 320 Brake Assist System llle 321 Electronic Roll Mitigation 322 Electronic Stability Program 328 Traction Control System 321 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 322 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 155 Electronic Stability Program ESP 205 328 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 213 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher 392 Jacking duces ooo aoa hind etra 393 Jump Starting 6 6 eee 400 Overheating aapea pio ioe ibo ies dn 392 TOWING uy sh ei dee ee ea eh Sa Ros 402 Emission Control System Maintenance 409 452 en INDEX 483 ENGINE nre AU Cede a ae Tat ib 407 Aur Cleaner 33 hope dag e uer AG Y 414 Block Heater llle 291 Break In Recommendations 80 Checking Oil Level kei REEEREER 411 Compartment 2 rises Fer dace m
379. sh damp towel to remove the soap 7 residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove the soap residue Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR Total Clean and if necessary follow with MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean leather upholstery Ap plication of a leather condi
380. sh the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or un defined None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Program Type ddr ld Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Program Type 16 a d Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Musi
381. should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on the hips and as snug as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING Continued e A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant For additional information refer to Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could c
382. sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Adding Washer Fluid The windshield and rear window washers share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling o
383. structions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully AQ WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts pr
384. t antifreeze is not recommended Selection of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility
385. t cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time that it takes to blink
386. t no moving parts of the Sky Slider can injure a person or animal Never place any extremities hands feet etc near the Sky Slider components or the roof area while operating the Sky Slider If potential danger exists while opening or closing the Sky Slider in Automatic Mode press and release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation If potential danger exists while opening or closing the Sky Slider in Operator Mode release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation Continued 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x WARNING Continued Do not allow small children to operate the Sky Slider Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the Sky Slider while operating the Power Top switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Power Top Control The Power Top switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 034305976 Power Top Switch NOTE The Power Top switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when the accessory delay feature is active Opening the Sky Slider Using Automatic Mode Press the switch rear
387. t be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an aut
388. t to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having fixed lower attachments or flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board seating positions only The center seating position will accommodate LATCH compatible lower anchorages with flexible webbing mounted attachments only Re gardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for th
389. t when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain w
390. tability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation of the Brake Warni
391. table pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the memory switch on the driver s door panel will recall memory profiles To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When on is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When on is selected the system will automatically acti vate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears When Off is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until On or Off appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized
392. takes over Push and release the ON OFF button located the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph O on the end of the Electronic Speed Control 40 km h lever The Cruise indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise indicator lamp will turn off Be sure to turn the Electronic Speed Control system off when not in use NOTE e The Electronic Speed Control system will automati cally turn off when the engine is turned off The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel e The Electronic Speed Control system is designed to shut down if you operate multiple speed control switch functions simultaneously i e Set and Cancel If this occurs push and release the ON OFF button to reactivate the system and then reestablish the desired Set speed 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system Off when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press down on the SET DECEL lever and release Release the accel erator and the vehicle will o
393. te when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Power Window Switches 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Auto Down Feature The driver power window switch has an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessorie
394. th cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification Sys tem serviced as well 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Enhanced Accident Response System Maintaining Your Airbag System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to e Cuts off fuel to the engine protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or e Flashes hazard lights stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side
395. the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure prop
396. the multifunction control lever on the left side of the steering column toward you to switch to Low beam 8 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the fog lights are ON 9 Speedometer Shows the vehicle speed 10 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 12 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on
397. the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occu pant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified Ensure that the front passenger seatback does not touch anything placed on the back seat because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrumen
398. tic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed ir against you 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be obtained imme diately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle
399. tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are mo
400. tive The ESP TCS Indicator light also nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents in light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the cluding those resulting from excessive speed in accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro a is planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can D P ppeectand dbbng Qo He P ovallng toad prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Depending upon model and mode of operation the ESP system has up to three operating modes ESP On Partial Off and Full Off 330 STARTING AND OPERATING M ESP On 2WD Vehicles and 4WD Vehicles in 2WD and 4WD High Range This is the normal operating mode for ESP when operat ing a 2WD vehicle It is also the normal mode for operating a 4WD vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH range The ESP system will be in ESP On mode whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted out of 4WD LOW range This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off and to Full Off for additional i
401. to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued WARNING Continued e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To pre
402. to the child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position Inserting Ignition Key 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the child lock 1 WARNING control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock Inserting Ignition Key 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door 1 Open the rear door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will opera
403. to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your k
404. try Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining k
405. tton 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Illumination Approach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the lock signal Sound Horn with Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehi
406. tton This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift to 3rd gear NOTE TOW HAUL mode locks out Overdrive Tow Haul Button The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started 208 STARTING AND OPERATING M Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in 2nd gear in any forward driving range To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only 2nd gear range will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your autho rized
407. ture operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SE
408. turers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality 364 STARTING AND OPERATING M The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MT
409. u back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the
410. unlock it 4 Remove the bulb and connector assembly from the headlight housing 5 Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and then connect the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlight housing and rotate the lock ring clockwise to lock it in place 7 Close the hood 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Front Turn Signal and Front Side Marker Lights 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right to access the left front turn signal or side marker Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left to access the right front turn signal or side marker 2 Remove three push pins from the wheel well liner 3 Gently flex the wheel well liner forward to access the bulb 4 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing 5 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace ment bulb 6 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reposition the wheel well liner and install the push pins Front Fog Light 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlight housing to access the bulb 3 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and s
411. ures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it 344 STARTING AND OPERATING M Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep th
412. use of moisture build up inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Air Conditioning Control Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e Economy Mode If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 81c2cd46 Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation The Infrared Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger To ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 accomplish this the system gathers information from the cabin infrared sensor mounted between the sun visors and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle The controls on the climate control provide the syst
413. using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e wwWw jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellu lar phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone Jt for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped
414. ust increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will still be on In this situa tion the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equ
415. vent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant anti freeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the rad
416. vice s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line liste
417. volutions per minute rpm x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 16 4AWD LOW Indicator If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in i D the 4WD LOW mode In this mode the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 17 Hill Descent Control Indicator If Equipped The symbol indicates the status of the Hill D Descent Control HDC feature The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempt ing to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off 18 TOWIHAUL Indicator If Equipped This light will illuminate when selecting TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is lo TOW UL cated on the gearshift bezel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 19 4WD Indicator Vehicles Equipped with Command Trac This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the four wheel drive mode In this mode the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are me chanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 20 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Indicator Light If Equipped The malfunction indicator for the Electroni
418. w the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury braking conditions The system operates with a separate Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dan computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent gerous for a number of reasons A child or others wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery could be injured Do not leave the keys in the surfaces m ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km
419. ward and release it within one half second and the Sky Slider will open from the front and move automatically toward the rear of the vehicle Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the Sky Slider will open from the rear and move automatically toward the front of the vehicle For either operation the Sky Slider will open fully and stop automatically unless you interrupt the operation by pressing and releasing the switch again NOTE e You can press the switch in either direction to interrupt the operation e To resume the operation from a partially open posi tion press and release the switch a second time 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx e The Sky Slider will not open from the front and the rear at the same time The Sky Slider must close fully before opening it from the opposite end Using Operator Mode Press the switch forward and hold it and the Sky Slider will open from the front and move toward the rear of the vehicle Press the switch rearward and hold it and the Sky Slider will open from the rear and move toward the front of the vehicle For either operation the Sky Slider will open fully and stop automatically unless you interrupt the operation by releasing the switch To resume the operation from a partially open position press and hold the switch a second time NOTE The Sky Slider will not open from the front and the rear at the same time The Sky Sl
420. warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Mode Control Air Direction Use this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as iden tified by the symbols on the control or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level a Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and s
421. wer setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and UConnect Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on th
422. wo consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button one time NOTE To avoid inadvertent shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not Manual Raar cere inside the vehicle before closing the door BH To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the NOTE The manual door locks will not lock or unlock door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward the liftgate WARNING e For p
423. y Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should after handling 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment
424. y exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 SKY SLIDER FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF CAUTION Continued The Sky Slider is a full length soft top power roof that opens front to rear or rear to front O
425. y on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Ioggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicati

2009 Jeep Liberty Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents